ZyXEL P-2612HW Quick Start Guide

Add to my manuals
547 Pages

advertisement

ZyXEL P-2612HW Quick Start Guide | Manualzz

P-2612HW Series

802.11g Wireless ADSL VoIP IAD

Default Login Details

IP Address

User Login

Administrator

Login http://192.168.1.1

User Name: user

Password: user

User Name: admin

Password: 1234

Firmware Version 3.70

Edition 2, 5/2009

www.zyxel.com

www.zyxel.com

Copyright © 2009

ZyXEL Communications Corporation

About This User's Guide

About This User's Guide

Intended Audience

This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.

Related Documentation

• Quick Start Guide

The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.

Note: It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the ZyXEL

Device.

• Supporting Disc

Refer to the included CD for support documents.

• ZyXEL Web Site

Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.

User Guide Feedback

Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!

The Technical Writing Team,

ZyXEL Communications Corp.,

6 Innovation Road II,

Science-Based Industrial Park,

Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.

E-mail: [email protected]

Customer Support

In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/ web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

3

About This User's Guide

• Product model and serial number.

• Warranty Information.

• Date that you received your device.

• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.

4

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Document Conventions

Document Conventions

Warnings and Notes

These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.

Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.

Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.

Syntax Conventions

• The P-2612HW Series may be referred to as the “ZyXEL Device”, the “device”, the “system” or the “product” in this User’s Guide.

• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.

• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,

[ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.

• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the

[ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.

• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click

Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the

Log Setting tab to get to that screen.

• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value.

For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.

• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.

5

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Document Conventions

Icons Used in Figures

Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device.

ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer

Server DSLAM

Telephone Switch

Firewall

Router

6

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Safety Warnings

Safety Warnings

• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

• Do NOT store things on the device.

• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.

• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.

• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.

• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.

• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in

North America or 230V AC in Europe).

• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.

• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.

• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.

• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.

• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.

• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).

Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.

7

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Safety Warnings

8

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Contents Overview

Contents Overview

Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 23

Introducing the ZyXEL Device ................................................................................................... 25

Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 31

Wizards...................................................................................................................................... 39

Tutorial ....................................................................................................................................... 57

Advanced ................................................................................................................................ 87

Status Screens .......................................................................................................................... 89

WAN Setup ................................................................................................................................ 99

LAN Setup ............................................................................................................................... 121

Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 137

Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 169

Voice ........................................................................................................................................ 185

Phone Usage ........................................................................................................................... 221

Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 229

Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................... 251

VPN ......................................................................................................................................... 257

Certificates ............................................................................................................................... 291

Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 321

802.1Q/1P ............................................................................................................................... 325

Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................... 337

Dynamic DNS Setup ................................................................................................................ 353

Remote Management Configuration ........................................................................................ 357

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 369

Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Specifications .......................................................... 383

System ..................................................................................................................................... 385

Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 391

Call History ............................................................................................................................. 407

Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 413

Diagnostic ............................................................................................................................... 433

Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 437

Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 445

Appendices and Index ......................................................................................................... 457

9

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Contents Overview

10

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3

Document Conventions............................................................................................................ 5

Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 7

Contents Overview ................................................................................................................... 9

Table of Contents.................................................................................................................... 11

Part I: Introduction................................................................................. 23

Chapter 1

Introducing the ZyXEL Device ............................................................................................... 25

1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 25

1.1.1 Internet Access .......................................................................................................... 25

1.1.2 VoIP Features ............................................................................................................ 27

1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device .................................................................................... 27

1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device ..................................................................... 28

1.4 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................... 28

1.5 The RESET Button .............................................................................................................. 29

1.6 The WLAN Button ................................................................................................................ 30

Chapter 2

Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................ 31

2.1 Web Configurator Overview ................................................................................................. 31

2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator ................................................................................ 31

2.2 Web Configurator Main Screen ........................................................................................... 33

2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................... 33

2.2.2 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 34

2.2.3 Main Window .............................................................................................................. 38

2.2.4 Status Bar ................................................................................................................... 38

Chapter 3

Wizards .................................................................................................................................... 39

3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 39

3.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup ............................................................................................. 39

3.2.1 Manual Configuration ................................................................................................. 42

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

11

Table of Contents

3.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup ..................................................................................... 46

3.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key .............................................................................. 49

3.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key ...................................................................................... 50

3.4 VoIP Setup Wizard .............................................................................................................. 51

3.4.1 SIP Settings ............................................................................................................... 52

3.4.2 Registration Complete ................................................................................................ 53

Chapter 4

Tutorial ..................................................................................................................................... 57

4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 57

4.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network ...................................................................................... 57

4.2.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 57

4.2.2 Configuring the AP ..................................................................................................... 58

4.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client .................................................................................. 60

4.3 Using NAT with Multiple Public IP Addresses ...................................................................... 66

4.3.1 Example Parameters and Scenario ........................................................................... 66

4.3.2 Configuring the WAN Connection with a Static IP Address ........................................ 67

4.3.3 Public IP Address Mapping ........................................................................................ 70

4.3.4 Forwarding Traffic from the WAN to a Local Computer .............................................. 74

4.3.5 Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic through the Firewall .......................................................... 75

4.3.6 Testing the Connections ............................................................................................. 83

4.4 Using NAT with Multiple Game Players ............................................................................... 83

4.5 How to Make a VoIP Call ..................................................................................................... 84

4.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account ................................................................ 84

Part II: Advanced.................................................................................... 87

Chapter 5

Status Screens ........................................................................................................................ 89

5.1 Status Screen ...................................................................................................................... 89

5.2 Any IP Table ........................................................................................................................ 94

5.3 WLAN Status ....................................................................................................................... 94

5.4 Packet Statistics .................................................................................................................. 95

5.5 VoIP Statistics ...................................................................................................................... 97

Chapter 6

WAN Setup............................................................................................................................... 99

6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 99

6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ..................................................................... 99

6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ...................................................................... 100

6.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 100

12

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen ................................................................................... 101

6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup ............................................................................. 104

6.3 The More Connections Screen ......................................................................................... 105

6.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................ 107

6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup ......................................................110

6.4 The WAN Backup Setup Screen .......................................................................................112

6.5 WAN Technical Reference ..................................................................................................113

6.5.1 Encapsulation ............................................................................................................113

6.5.2 Multiplexing ...............................................................................................................115

6.5.3 VPI and VCI ..............................................................................................................115

6.5.4 IP Address Assignment .............................................................................................115

6.5.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ....................................................................................116

6.5.6 NAT ...........................................................................................................................116

6.5.7 Metric .......................................................................................................................116

6.5.8 Traffic Shaping ..........................................................................................................117

6.6 Traffic Redirect ...................................................................................................................119

Chapter 7

LAN Setup.............................................................................................................................. 121

7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 121

7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens ..................................................................... 121

7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN ....................................................................... 122

7.1.3 Before You Begin ..................................................................................................... 122

7.2 The LAN IP Screen ............................................................................................................ 122

7.2.1 The Advanced LAN Setup Screen ........................................................................... 124

7.2.2 Configuring the Advanced LAN Setup Screen ......................................................... 125

7.3 The LAN Client List Screen ............................................................................................... 126

7.4 The LAN IP Alias Screen ................................................................................................... 128

7.5 LAN Technical Reference .................................................................................................. 129

7.5.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device ........................................................................ 130

7.5.2 DHCP Setup ............................................................................................................. 130

7.5.3 DNS Server Addresses ............................................................................................ 130

7.5.4 TCP/IP ...................................................................................................................... 131

7.5.5 RIP Setup ................................................................................................................. 132

7.5.6 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 133

7.5.7 Any IP ....................................................................................................................... 133

Chapter 8

Wireless LAN......................................................................................................................... 137

8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 137

8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens ...................................................... 137

8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................. 138

8.1.3 Before You Start ....................................................................................................... 140

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

13

Table of Contents

8.2 AP Screen ........................................................................................................................ 140

8.2.1 No Security ............................................................................................................... 142

8.2.2 WEP Encryption ....................................................................................................... 143

8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK ............................................................................................................ 144

8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication Screen ................................................................................. 146

8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup ............................................................................... 148

8.3 More AP Screen ................................................................................................................ 149

8.3.1 More AP Edit ............................................................................................................ 150

8.4 MAC Filter ..................................................................................................................... 151

8.5 WPS .................................................................................................................................. 152

8.6 WPS Station ...................................................................................................................... 153

8.7 WDS Screen ..................................................................................................................... 154

8.8 Scheduling Screen ........................................................................................................... 156

8.9 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ................................................................................... 157

8.9.1 Additional Wireless Terms ........................................................................................ 157

8.9.2 Wireless Security Overview ..................................................................................... 157

8.9.3 MBSSID ................................................................................................................... 160

8.9.4 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ........................................................................ 160

8.9.5 WiFi Protected Setup ............................................................................................... 161

Chapter 9

Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 169

9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 169

9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ..................................................................... 169

9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ....................................................................... 169

9.2 NAT General Setup ............................................................................................................ 170

9.3 Port Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 172

9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen .................................................................. 173

9.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Edit ....................................................................................... 175

9.4 Address Mapping .............................................................................................................. 176

9.4.1 Address Mapping Rule Edit ..................................................................................... 177

9.4.2 SIP ALG .................................................................................................................. 178

9.5 NAT Technical Reference .................................................................................................. 179

9.5.1 NAT Definitions ........................................................................................................ 179

9.5.2 What NAT Does ....................................................................................................... 180

9.5.3 How NAT Works ....................................................................................................... 180

9.5.4 NAT Application ........................................................................................................ 182

9.5.5 NAT Mapping Types ................................................................................................. 182

Chapter 10

Voice....................................................................................................................................... 185

10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 185

10.1.1 What You Can Do in the VoIP Screens .................................................................. 185

14

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

10.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ..................................................................... 186

10.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 187

10.2 The SIP Settings Screen ................................................................................................ 187

10.3 The Advanced SIP Setup Screen ................................................................................... 190

10.4 The SIP QoS Screen ...................................................................................................... 193

10.5 The Analog Phone Screen ............................................................................................. 194

10.6 The Advanced Analog Phone Setup Screen .................................................................. 194

10.6.1 Configuring the Advanced Analog Phone Screen .................................................. 195

10.7 The Phone Settings Ext. Table Screen ........................................................................... 197

10.8 The Common Phone Settings Screen ............................................................................ 198

10.9 The Phone Region Screen ............................................................................................. 199

10.10 The Speed Dial Screen .................................................................................................. 200

10.11 Incoming Call Policy Screen ......................................................................................... 203

10.12 SIP Prefix Screen .......................................................................................................... 205

10.13 SIP Technical Reference ............................................................................................... 206

10.13.1 VoIP ...................................................................................................................... 206

10.13.2 SIP ...................................................................................................................... 206

10.13.3 Quality of Service (QoS) ...................................................................................... 215

10.13.4 Phone Services Overview .................................................................................... 216

Chapter 11

Phone Usage ......................................................................................................................... 221

11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 221

11.2 Dialing a Telephone Number ............................................................................................ 221

11.3 Using Speed Dial to Dial a Telephone Number ................................................................ 221

11.4 Using Call Park and Pickup ............................................................................................. 221

11.5 Checking the ZyXEL Device’s IP Address ....................................................................... 222

11.6 Auto Provisioning and Auto Firmware Upgrade ............................................................... 222

11.7 Phone Services Overview ................................................................................................ 223

11.7.1 The Flash Key ........................................................................................................ 223

11.7.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services ........................................................ 223

11.7.3 USA Type Supplementary Services ....................................................................... 225

11.8 Phone Functions Summary .............................................................................................. 227

Chapter 12

Firewall................................................................................................................................... 229

12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 229

12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ............................................................. 229

12.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ................................................................ 230

12.1.3 Firewall Rule Setup Example ................................................................................. 230

12.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................... 234

12.3 The Firewall Rule Screen ................................................................................................ 236

12.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules .................................................................................... 237

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

15

Table of Contents

12.3.2 Customized Services ............................................................................................ 240

12.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service ....................................................................... 241

12.4 The Firewall Threshold Screen ........................................................................................ 241

12.4.1 Threshold Values ................................................................................................... 242

12.4.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds ............................................................................. 243

12.5 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................... 245

12.5.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................... 245

12.5.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................... 246

12.5.3 Security Considerations ......................................................................................... 247

12.5.4 Triangle Route ........................................................................................................ 247

Chapter 13

Content Filtering ................................................................................................................... 251

13.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 251

13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Content Filter Screens .................................................... 251

13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Content Filtering .................................................. 251

13.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 251

13.1.4 Content Filtering Example ...................................................................................... 252

13.2 The Keyword Screen ...................................................................................................... 254

13.3 The Schedule Screen ..................................................................................................... 255

13.4 The Trusted Screen ........................................................................................................ 256

Chapter 14

VPN......................................................................................................................................... 257

14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 257

14.1.1 What You Can Do in the VPN Screens .................................................................. 257

14.1.2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN ........................................................... 258

14.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 259

14.2 VPN Setup Screen ......................................................................................................... 260

14.3 The VPN Edit Screen ..................................................................................................... 262

14.4 Configuring Advanced IKE Settings ............................................................................... 268

14.5 Manual Key Setup ........................................................................................................... 271

14.5.1 Security Parameter Index (SPI) ............................................................................ 271

14.6 Configuring Manual Key ................................................................................................. 272

14.7 Viewing SA Monitor ........................................................................................................ 275

14.8 Configuring VPN Global Setting ..................................................................................... 277

14.9 IPSec VPN Technical Reference ..................................................................................... 277

14.9.1 IPSec Architecture ................................................................................................. 278

14.9.2 IPSec and NAT ....................................................................................................... 278

14.9.3 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal ............................................................................... 279

14.9.4 Encapsulation ......................................................................................................... 281

14.9.5 IKE Phases ........................................................................................................... 282

14.9.6 Negotiation Mode ................................................................................................... 283

16

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

14.9.7 Keep Alive .............................................................................................................. 283

14.9.8 Remote DNS Server .............................................................................................. 283

14.9.9 ID Type and Content .............................................................................................. 284

14.9.10 Pre-Shared Key .................................................................................................... 286

14.9.11 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups .......................................................................... 286

14.9.12 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples ................................................................... 286

Chapter 15

Certificates ............................................................................................................................ 291

15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 291

15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Certificate Screens ......................................................... 291

15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Certificates ........................................................... 291

15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate ............................................................................................. 293

15.2 My Certificates ................................................................................................................. 295

15.3 My Certificate Details ...................................................................................................... 297

15.3.1 Using the My Certificate Import Screen ................................................................. 301

15.4 My Certificate Create ...................................................................................................... 301

15.5 Trusted CAs ................................................................................................................... 304

15.6 Trusted CA Import ......................................................................................................... 306

15.7 Trusted CA Details ........................................................................................................... 307

15.8 Trusted Remote Hosts ....................................................................................................311

15.9 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details ....................................................................... 312

15.10 Trusted Remote Hosts Import ...................................................................................... 315

15.11 Directory Servers ........................................................................................................... 316

15.12 Directory Server Add and Edit ...................................................................................... 318

Chapter 16

Static Route ........................................................................................................................... 321

16.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 321

16.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ...................................................... 321

16.2 Configuring Static Route .................................................................................................. 322

16.2.1 Static Route Edit ................................................................................................... 323

Chapter 17

802.1Q/1P............................................................................................................................... 325

17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 325

17.1.1 What You Can Do in the 802.1Q/1P Screens ........................................................ 325

17.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q/1P ........................................................... 325

17.1.3 802.1Q/1P Example ............................................................................................... 327

17.2 The 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Screen ............................................................................. 332

17.2.1 Editing 802.1Q/1P Group Setting ........................................................................... 333

17.3 The 802.1Q/1P Port Setting Screen ................................................................................ 335

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

17

Table of Contents

Chapter 18

Quality of Service (QoS)....................................................................................................... 337

18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 337

18.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens .................................................................. 337

18.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS ..................................................................... 338

18.1.3 QoS Class Setup Example ..................................................................................... 338

18.2 The QoS General Screen ............................................................................................... 341

18.3 The Class Setup Screen ................................................................................................ 343

18.3.1 The Class Configuration Screen ........................................................................... 345

18.4 The QoS Monitor Screen ................................................................................................ 349

18.5 QoS Technical Reference ................................................................................................ 349

18.5.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag ................................................................................................... 350

18.5.2 IP Precedence ........................................................................................................ 350

18.5.3 DiffServ ................................................................................................................. 350

18.5.4 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment ................................................................... 351

Chapter 19

Dynamic DNS Setup ............................................................................................................. 353

19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 353

19.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ................................................................. 353

19.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS .................................................................. 353

19.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS .............................................................................................. 354

Chapter 20

Remote Management Configuration ................................................................................... 357

20.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 357

20.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ....................................... 358

20.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management .......................................... 358

20.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................... 359

20.3 The Telnet Screen ........................................................................................................... 360

20.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................. 361

20.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................... 362

20.5.1 Configuring SNMP ................................................................................................. 364

20.6 The DNS Screen ............................................................................................................ 365

20.7 The ICMP Screen ............................................................................................................ 366

Chapter 21

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).......................................................................................... 369

21.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 369

21.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen .................................................................. 369

21.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP ................................................................... 369

21.2 The UPnP Screen ............................................................................................................ 371

21.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 371

18

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

21.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................. 375

Part III: Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Specifications ............. 383

Chapter 22

System ................................................................................................................................... 385

22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 385

22.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens ................................................ 385

22.1.2 What You Need to Know About System Settings ................................................... 385

22.2 The General Screen ........................................................................................................ 386

22.3 The Time Setting Screen ................................................................................................ 388

Chapter 23

Logs ...................................................................................................................................... 391

23.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 391

23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Log Screens .................................................................... 391

23.1.2 What You Need To Know About Logs .................................................................... 391

23.2 The View Log Screen ...................................................................................................... 391

23.3 The Log Settings Screen ................................................................................................. 392

23.4 SMTP Error Messages .................................................................................................... 395

23.4.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................... 395

23.5 Log Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 396

Chapter 24

Call History ........................................................................................................................... 407

24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 407

24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Call History Screens ....................................................... 407

24.2 Call History Summary Screen ........................................................................................ 407

24.3 Viewing the Call History .................................................................................................. 408

24.4 Configuring Call History Settings .................................................................................... 409

Chapter 25

Tools....................................................................................................................................... 413

25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 413

25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens ................................................................... 413

25.1.2 What You Need To Know About Tools .................................................................... 413

25.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 415

25.1.4 Tool Examples ........................................................................................................ 415

25.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen ............................................................................................ 420

25.3 The Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 423

25.3.1 Reset to Factory Defaults ...................................................................................... 425

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

19

Table of Contents

25.4 Restart ............................................................................................................................. 426

25.5 Using FTP or TFTP to Back Up Configuration ................................................................ 426

25.5.1 Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration ............................................ 426

25.5.2 FTP Command Configuration Backup Example ................................................... 427

25.5.3 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients ............................................ 427

25.5.4 Backup Configuration Using TFTP ......................................................................... 427

25.5.5 TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example .................................................. 428

25.5.6 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients .......................................... 429

25.6 Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration ............................................................... 429

25.6.1 Restore Using FTP Session Example .................................................................... 430

25.7 FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads .............................................. 430

25.7.1 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example ................................. 430

25.7.2 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload .................................................... 431

25.7.3 TFTP File Upload ................................................................................................... 431

25.7.4 TFTP Upload Command Example ......................................................................... 432

Chapter 26

Diagnostic ............................................................................................................................. 433

26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 433

26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................... 433

26.2 The General Diagnostic Screen ...................................................................................... 433

26.3 The DSL Line Diagnostic Screen .................................................................................... 434

Chapter 27

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 437

27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 437

27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 437

27.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login .................................................................................... 438

27.4 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 440

27.5 Phone Calls and VoIP ...................................................................................................... 441

27.6 Multiple SIP Accounts ...................................................................................................... 442

27.6.1 Outgoing Calls ........................................................................................................ 442

27.6.2 Incoming Calls ........................................................................................................ 443

Chapter 28

Product Specifications ......................................................................................................... 445

Part IV: Appendices and Index ........................................................... 457

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address ........................................................... 459

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ...................................... 485

20

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting ........................................................................... 495

Appendix D Wireless LANs .................................................................................................. 507

Appendix E Common Services............................................................................................. 531

Appendix F Legal Information .............................................................................................. 535

Index....................................................................................................................................... 537

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

21

Table of Contents

22

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

P

ART

I

Introduction

Introducing the ZyXEL Device (25)

Introducing the Web Configurator (31)

Wizards (39)

Tutorial (57)

23

24

C H A P T E R 1

Introducing the ZyXEL Device

1.1 Overview

The P-2612HW Series is an Integrated Access Device (IAD) that combines an

ADSL2+ router with Voice over IP (VoIP) communication capabilities to allow you to use a traditional analog telephone to make Internet calls. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared

Internet access. The ZyXEL Device is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering.

Please refer to the following description of the product name format.

• “H” denotes an integrated 4-port hub (switch).

• “W” denotes wireless functionality. There is an embedded mini-PCI module for

IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN connectivity. All wireless features documented in this user’s guide refer to the “W” models only.

Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.

See the chapter on product specifications for a full list of features.

1.1.1 Internet Access

Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. If you prefer not to use a DSL line and you have another broadband modem or router (such as ADSL) available, you can push the DSL/WAN switch (on the rear panel) to the WAN side and connect the WAN port to the broadband modem or router. This way, you can access the Internet via an Ethernet connection and still use the QoS, Firewall and VoIP functions on the ZyXEL Device.

25

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device

Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).

Figure 1 ZyXEL Device’s Router Features

LAN

Internet

You can also configure firewall and content filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the

Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files.

Use content filtering to block access to specific web sites, with URLs containing keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled and include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering. For example, you could block access to certain web sites for the kids.

Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the ZyXEL Device gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the boss’s excessive file downloading.

26

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device

1.1.2 VoIP Features

You can register up to 2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) accounts and use the

ZyXEL Device to make and receive VoIP telephone calls:

Figure 2 ZyXEL Device’s VoIP Features

A

B

Internet

PSTN

• Peer-to-Peer calls (A) - Use the ZyXEL Device to make a call to the recipient’s IP address without using a SIP proxy server.

• Calls via a VoIP service provider (B) - The ZyXEL Device sends your call to a

VoIP service provider’s SIP server which forwards your calls to either VoIP or

PSTN phones.

1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device

Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device.

• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL

Device using a (supported) web browser.

• Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers.

• FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.

• SNMP. The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager. See the SNMP chapter in this User’s Guide.

• SPTGEN. SPTGEN is a text configuration file that allows you to configure the device by uploading an SPTGEN file. This is especially convenient if you need to configure many devices of the same type.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

27

Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device

1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device

Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively.

• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.

• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.

• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it).

Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the

ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device.

You could simply restore your last configuration.

1.4 LEDs (Lights)

The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.

Figure 3 LEDs on the Top of the Device

None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.

Table 1 LED Descriptions

LED

POWER

ETHERNET

1-4

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Green

Red

Green

On The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is self-testing.

On

Off

On

The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction.

The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.

The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN).

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the

LAN.

Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.

28

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device

Table 1 LED Descriptions

LED

WLAN

DSL

COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION

Green On The wireless network is activated and is operating in

IEEE 802.11b/g mode.

Green

INTERNET Green

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients.

Off

On

The wireless network is not activated.

This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in DSL WAN mode. The DSL line is up.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the DSL line.

Off The DSL line is down.

On The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic.

WAN

PHONE

Red

Green

Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.

On The ZyXEL Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed.

Off

On

The ZyXEL Device does not have an IP connection.

This light applies when the ZyXEL Device is in Ethernet

WAN mode. The ZyXEL Device has an Ethernet connection with a device on the WAN.

Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to/from the

WAN.

Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the WAN.

Green On

Orange On

A SIP account is registered for the phone port.

Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook or there is an incoming call.

A SIP account is registered for the phone port and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account.

Blinking A telephone connected to the phone port has its receiver off of the hook and there is a voice message in the corresponding SIP account.

Off The phone port does not have a SIP account registered.

Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections.

1.5 The RESET Button

If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

29

Chapter 1 Introducing the ZyXEL Device configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the passwords will be reset to the defaults.

1

Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).

2

To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the

POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.

1.6 The WLAN Button

Use the WLAN button ( ) on the top of the device to turn the wireless LAN off or on. Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking) before using the WLAN button.

• Press the WLAN button for one second and release it. The WLAN LED should change from on to off or vice versa.

• Press the WLAN button for five seconds to turn on WPS. See

Section 8.9.5.1 on page 161 for more on using WPS to configure your wireless clients.

30

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2

Introducing the Web

Configurator

2.1 Web Configurator Overview

The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.

• JavaScripts (enabled by default).

• Java permissions (enabled by default).

See Appendix B on page 485 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed

in Internet Explorer.

Note: This document uses the screenshots of P-2612HW-F1 for examples.

2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator

1

Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick

Start Guide).

2

Launch your web browser.

3

Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL.

31

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

4

A password screen displays. Type “admin” (default) as the username and “1234” as the password, and click Login. Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login.

Figure 4 Password Screen

Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again.

32

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

2.2 Web Configurator Main Screen

Figure 5 Main Screen

A

C

B

D

As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar

B - navigation panel

C - main window

D - status bar

2.2.1 Title Bar

The title bar allows you to change the language and provides some icons in the upper right corner.

33

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

The icons provide the following functions.

Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Wizards: Click this icon to go to the configuration wizards. See

Chapter

3 on page 39 for more information.

Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.

2.2.2 Navigation Panel

Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL

Device features. The following tables describe each menu item.

Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary

LINK

Status

TAB FUNCTION

This screen shows the ZyXEL Device’s general device and network status information. Use this screen to access the statistics and client list.

Network

WAN Internet

Access Setup

LAN IP

Client List

IP Alias

Wireless LAN AP

More AP

MAC Filter

WPS

WPS Station

WDS

Scheduling

Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties.

Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings,

DHCP settings, enable Any IP and configure other advanced properties.

Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses (and host names).

Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets.

Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings.

Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the

ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific wireless clients or exclude specific wireless clients from accessing the ZyXEL

Device.

Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the

ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to configure WPS (Wi-Fi Protected

Setup) settings.

Use this screen to configure your WDS (Wireless

Distribution System) links between the ZyXEL Device and other wireless APs.

Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN.

34

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary

LINK

NAT

TAB

General

Port

Forwarding

Address

Mapping

ALG

FUNCTION

Use this screen to use WPS to set up your wireless network.

Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world.

Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules.

Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.

VoIP

SIP

Phone

Phone Book

SIP Settings Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device’s Voice over

IP settings.

QoS

Analog Phone Use this screen to set which phone ports use which

SIP accounts.

Ext. Table Use this screen to assign extension numbers to phones connected to the ZyXEL Device.

Common

Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device’s Quality of

Service settings for VoIP.

Region

Use this screen to configure general phone port settings.

Use this screen to select your location and call service mode.

Speed Dial Use this screen to configure speed dial for SIP phone numbers that you call often.

Use this screen to configure call-forwarding.

Incoming Call

Policy

SIP Prefix Use this screen to set up numbers you dial on your phone to specify which SIP account you want to use for a call.

Security

Firewall General

Rules

Threshold

Content Filter Keyword

Schedule

Trusted

Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall and the default action to take on network traffic going in specific directions.

This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule.

Use this screen to configure the thresholds for determining when to drop sessions that do not become fully established.

Use this screen to block access to web sites containing certain keywords in the URL.

Use this screen to set the days and times for your device to perform content filtering.

Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the

LAN from content filtering.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

35

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary

LINK

VPN

TAB

Setup

FUNCTION

Use this screen to configure each VPN tunnel.

Certificates

Monitor

VPN Global

Setting

Use this screen to look at the current status of each

VPN tunnel.

Use this screen to allow NetBIOS traffic through VPN tunnels.

My Certificates Use this screen to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the

ZyXEL Device’s CA-signed certificates.

Trusted CAs Use this screen to save CA certificates to the ZyXEL

Device.

Use this screen to import self-signed certificates.

Trusted

Remote Hosts

Directory

Servers

Use this screen to configure a list of addresses of directory servers (that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates).

Advanced

Static Route Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes to tell your device about networks beyond the directly connected remote nodes.

802.1Q/1P Group Setting

QoS

Dynamic DNS

Port Setting

General

Class Setup

Monitor

Use this screen to activate 802.1Q/1P, specify the management VLAN group, display the VLAN groups and configure the settings for each VLAN group.

Use this screen to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port.

Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing, and configure bandwidth management on the WAN.

Use this screen to define a classifier.

Use this screen to view each queue’s statistics.

This screen allows you to use a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address.

36

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary

LINK

Remote

MGMT

TAB

HTTP

Telnet

FTP

SNMP

DNS

ICMP

General

FUNCTION

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device’s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management.

Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device.

Use this screen to set whether or not your device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available.

Use this screen to turn UPnP on or off.

UPnP

Maintenance

System

Logs

Call History

Tools

Diagnostic

General

Time Setting

View Log

Log Settings

Use this screen to configure your device’s name, domain name, management inactivity timeout and password.

Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date.

Use this screen to display your device’s logs.

Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your device is to record. You can also set it to email the logs to you.

Summary

Call History

Use this screen to view call history summary of a certain period.

Use this screen to view the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device.

Call History

Settings

General

Use this screen to configure to where the ZyXEL

Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records.

Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.

Firmware

Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration (settings) or reset the factory default settings.

Restart This screen allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off.

Use this screen to test the connections to other devices.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

37

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator

2.2.3 Main Window

The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document.

Right after you log in, the Status screen is displayed. See

Chapter 5 on page 89

for more information about the Status screen.

2.2.4 Status Bar

Check the status bar when you click Apply or OK to verify that the configuration has been updated.

38

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 3

Wizards

3.1 Overview

Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access, wireless, and making calls over the Internet with the information given to you by your ISP.

Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields.

3.2 Internet Access Wizard Setup

1

Click the wizard icon ( ) in the top right corner of the web configurator to go to the wizards. The Internet access wizard is not available when you set the DSL/

WAN switch to the WAN side and the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN in the WAN screen.

2

Click INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection.

Figure 6 Wizard Welcome

3

Your ZyXEL device attempts to detect your DSL connection and your connection type.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

39

Chapter 3 Wizards

3a

The following screen appears if a connection is not detected. Check your hardware connections and click Restart the INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP

Wizard to return to the wizard welcome screen. If you still cannot connect, click Manually configure your Internet connection. Follow the directions in the wizard and enter your Internet setup information as provided to you by your ISP. See

Section 3.2.1 on page 42 for more details.

If you would like to skip your Internet setup and configure the wireless LAN settings, leave Yes selected and click Next.

Figure 7 Auto Detection: No DSL Connection

3b

The following screen displays if a PPPoE or PPPoA connection is detected.

Enter your Internet account information (username, password and/or service

name) exactly as provided by your ISP. Then click Next and see Section 3.3 on page 46

for wireless connection wizard setup.

Figure 8 Auto-Detection: PPPoE

40

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

3c

The following screen appears if the ZyXEL device detects a connection but not the connection type. Click Next and refer to

Section 3.2.1 on page 42 on how

to manually configure the ZyXEL Device for Internet access.

Figure 9 Auto Detection: Failed

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

41

Chapter 3 Wizards

3.2.1 Manual Configuration

1

If the ZyXEL Device fails to detect your DSL connection type but the physical line is connected, enter your Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you. Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information.

Figure 10 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters

42

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup: ISP Parameters

LABEL

Mode

DESCRIPTION

Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ZyXEL Device.

Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on what you select in the

Mode field.

If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the ZyXEL Device uses RFC 1483.

Multiplexing

Virtual Circuit

ID

AUTO

VPI

VCI

SIP ALG

If you select Routing in the Mode field, select DHCP (ENET ENCAP) or

PPPoE.

Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplexing drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based.

VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.

Select the check box to use the default VPI and VCI (8 and 35).

Otherwise, clear the check box and enter the VPI and VCI manually in the fields below.

Enter the VPI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.

Enter the VCI assigned to you. This field may already be configured.

This field is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field.

Back

Next

Exit

Select ON to enable the SIP ALG in the ZyXEL Device and allow SIP calls to pass through NAT.

Select OFF to disable the SIP ALG in the ZyXEL Device.

Click Back to go back to the previous screen.

Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes.

2

The next wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use. All screens shown are with routing mode. Configure the fields and click

Next to continue. See

Section 3.3 on page 46 for wireless connection wizard

setup.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

43

Chapter 3 Wizards

Note: When you use the connection wizard to configure the Internet access using

PPPoE, the ZyXEL Device is set to get an IP address from the ISP automatically. To set up a static WAN IP address with PPPoE, use the Network

> WAN screen.

Figure 11 Internet Connection with PPPoE

44

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPoE

LABEL

User Name

Password

Back

Apply

Exit

DESCRIPTION

Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Figure 12 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP)

Chapter 3 Wizards

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 6 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Obtain an IP

Address

Automatical ly

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.

Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address.

Select Static IP Address if your ISP gave you an IP address to use.

Static IP

Address

IP Address Enter your ISP assigned IP address.

Subnet

Mask

Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.

Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting.

Gateway IP address

You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use DHCP (ENET ENCAP) in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen.

First DNS

Server

Second DNS

Server

Back

Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask.

As above.

Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

45

Chapter 3 Wizards

Table 6 Internet Connection with DHCP (ENET ENCAP) (continued)

LABEL

Apply

Exit

DESCRIPTION

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes.

• If the user name and/or password you entered for PPPoE connection are not correct, the screen displays as shown next. Click Back to Username and

Password setup to go back to the screen where you can modify them.

Figure 13 Connection Test Failed-1

• If the following screen displays, check if your account is activated or click

Restart the Internet/Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings.

Figure 14 Connection Test Failed-2.

3.3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup

See the back panel for the ZyXEL Device’s unique wireless SSID (network name) and WPA-PSK encryption key. Unless you want to use other wireless settings, you can close the wizard after you configure the Internet connection.

46

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

1

Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings. Otherwise, select No and skip to Step

6 .

Figure 15 Connection Test Successful

2

Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN. Click Next to continue.

Figure 16 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 7 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1

LABEL

Active

Back

Next

Exit

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN.

Click Back to display the previous screen.

Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

47

Chapter 3 Wizards

3

Configure your wireless settings in this screen. Click Next.

Figure 17 Wireless LAN

48

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 8 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2

LABEL

Network

Name(SSID)

DESCRIPTION

Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.

Channel

Selection

Security

Back

Next

Exit

If you change this field on the ZyXEL Device, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network.

The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a channel. Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device.

Select Manually assign a WPA-PSK key to configure a Pre-Shared Key

(WPA-PSK). Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA.

See

Section 3.3.1 on page 49 for more information.

Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key. See

Section

3.3.2 on page 50 for more information.

Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.

Click Back to display the previous screen.

Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

Note: The wireless stations and ZyXEL Device must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication.

4

This screen varies depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen. Fill in the field (if available) and click Next.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

3.3.1 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key

Choose Manually assign a WPA-PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key.

Figure 18 Manually Assign a WPA-PSK key

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 9 Manually Assign a WPA key

LABEL

Pre-Shared

Key

Back

Next

Exit

DESCRIPTION

Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens.

You need to configure an authentication server to do this.

Click Back to display the previous screen.

Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

49

Chapter 3 Wizards

3.3.2 Manually Assign a WEP Key

Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters.

Figure 19 Manually Assign a WEP key

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 10 Manually Assign a WEP key

LABEL

Key

DESCRIPTION

The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.

Back

Next

Exit

Enter any 5, 13 or 29 ASCII characters or 10, 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64-bit, 128-bit or 256-bit WEP key respectively.

Click Back to display the previous screen.

Click Next to proceed to the next screen.

Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

5

Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings.

Figure 20 Wireless LAN Setup 3

50

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

6

Use the read-only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct. Click Finish to complete and save the wizard setup.

Note: No wireless LAN settings display if you chose not to configure wireless LAN settings.

Figure 21 Internet Access and WLAN Wizard Setup Complete

7

Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of ZyXEL Device features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct.

3.4 VoIP Setup Wizard

Use this wizard to set up your VoIP account(s). Leave the default settings in fields if your VoIP service provider (the company that lets you make phone calls over the

Internet) did not provide any information. See Chapter 10 on page 185 and

Chapter 11 on page 221

for more information.

Note: You must have a SIP account before you can use this wizard.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

51

Chapter 3 Wizards

3.4.1 SIP Settings

Figure 22 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings

52

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 11 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings

LABEL

SIP1 (- SIP10)

Settings

SIP Number

DESCRIPTION

Use this screen to configure SIP settings for up to 10 SIP accounts.

SIP Server

Address

SIP Service

Domain

Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI (like [email protected]

), this is the part before the @ symbol. You can use up to

127 printable ASCII characters.

Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your

VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.

It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server.

Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI (like

[email protected]

), this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters.

Authentication

User Name Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

Table 11 VoIP Setup Wizard > SIP Settings

LABEL

Password

DESCRIPTION

Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters.

Select this if you want to set up additional SIP accounts.

Check here to set up SIP settings

< Back

Apply

Exit

Click this to go to the previous screen.

Click this to register your SIP account(s).

Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen.

3.4.2 Registration Complete

This screen depends on whether or not the ZyXEL Device successfully registered your SIP account(s).

Figure 23 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Success)

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

53

Chapter 3 Wizards

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 12 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Success)

LABEL

Return to

Wizard Main

Page

Go to Advanced

Setup page

Finish

DESCRIPTION

Click this to open the main wizard screen. See

Section 3.2 on page 39 .

Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen.

Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen.

If the ZyXEL Device cannot register your SIP account(s), see the Quick Start

Guide for troubleshooting suggestions.

Figure 24 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Fail)

54

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 13 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Fail)

LABEL

< Back

DESCRIPTION

Click this to go to the previous screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 3 Wizards

Table 13 VoIP Setup Wizard > Registration Complete (Fail)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Register Again Click this if you want the ZyXEL Device to try to register your SIP account(s) again.

Exit Click this to close this screen and return to the main screen. The ZyXEL

Device saves the information you provided.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

55

Chapter 3 Wizards

56

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 4

Tutorial

4.1 Overview

This chapter describes:

• how to set up a wireless network.

• how to use NAT with multiple public IP addresses.

• how to use NAT with multiple game players.

• how to make a VoIP call.

4.2 How to Set up a Wireless Network

This section gives you examples of how to set up an access point and wireless client for wireless communication using the following parameters. The wireless clients can access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device wirelessly.

4.2.1 Example Parameters

SSID

Security

802.11 mode

SSID_Example3

WPA-PSK

(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)

Mixed (IEEE 802.11b/g)

An access point (AP) or wireless router is referred to as the “AP” and a computer with a wireless network card or USB adapter is referred to as the “wireless client” here.

The M-302 utility screens are used here as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different models.

57

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4.2.2 Configuring the AP

Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your AP.

1

Open the Network > Wireless LAN > AP screen in the AP’s web configurator.

Figure 25 AP: Wireless LAN > AP

58

2

Make sure Active Wireless LAN is selected.

3

Enter “SSID_Example3” as the SSID and select a channel which is not used by another AP.

4

Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey” in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

5

Click the Advanced Setup button and select Mixed in the 802.11 Mode field.

Click Apply.

Figure 26 AP: Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup

6

Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under

Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface

Status.

Figure 27 AP: Status

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

59

Chapter 4 Tutorial

7

Click the WLAN Status hyperlink in the AP’s Status screen. You can see if any wireless client has connected to the AP.

Figure 28 AP: Status: WLAN Station Status

4.2.3 Configuring the Wireless Client

This section describes how to connect the wireless client to a network.

4.2.3.1 Connecting to a Wireless LAN

The following sections show you how to join a wireless network using the ZyXEL utility, as in the following diagram. The wireless client is labeled C and the access point is labeled AP.

Internet

C

AP

There are three ways to connect the client to an access point.

• Configure nothing and leave the wireless client to automatically scan for and connect to any available network that has no wireless security configured.

• Manually connect to a network.

• Configure a profile to have the wireless client automatically connect to a specific network or peer computer.

This example illustrates how to manually connect your wireless client to an access point (AP) which is configured for WPA-PSK security and connected to the

Internet. Before you connect to the access point, you must know its Service Set

IDentity (SSID) and WPA-PSK pre-shared key. In this example, the SSID is

“SSID_Example3” and the pre-shared key is “ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”.

After you install the ZyXEL utility and then insert the wireless client, follow the steps below to connect to a network using the Site Survey screen.

60

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

1

Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Site Survey tab to open the screen shown next.

Figure 29 ZyXEL Utility: Site Survey

2

The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks. Click

Scan if you want to search again. If no entry displays in the Available Network

List, that means there is no wireless network available within range. Make sure the AP or peer computer is turned on or move the wireless client closer to the AP or peer computer.

3

When you try to connect to an AP with security configured, a window will pop up prompting you to specify the security settings. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting.

Use the Next button to move on to the next screen. You can use the Back button at any time to return to the previous screen, or the Exit button to return to the

Site Survey screen.

Figure 30 ZyXEL Utility: Security Settings

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

61

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4

The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue.

Figure 31 ZyXEL Utility: Confirm Save

5

The ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the wireless network using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link Info screen displays details of the active connection. Check the network information in the Link Info screen to verify that you have successfully connected to the selected network. If the wireless client is not connected to a network, the fields in this screen remain blank.

Figure 32 ZyXEL Utility: Link Info

62

6

Open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured.

If you cannot access the web site, try changing the encryption type in the

Security Settings screen, check the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4.2.3.2 Creating and Using a Profile

A profile lets you easily connect to the same wireless network again later. You can also configure different profiles for different networks, for example if you connect a notebook computer to wireless networks at home and at work.

This example illustrates how to set up a profile and connect the wireless client to an AP configured for WPA-PSK security. In this example, the SSID is

“SSID_Example3”, the profile name is “PN_Example3” and the pre-shared key is

“ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey”. You have chosen the profile name

“PN_Example3”.

1

Open the ZyXEL utility and click the Profile tab to open the screen shown next.

Click Add to configure a new profile.

Figure 33 ZyXEL Utility: Profile

2

The Add New Profile screen appears. The wireless client automatically searches for available wireless networks, and displays them in the Scan Info box. Click

Scan if you want to search again. You can also configure your profile for a wireless network that is not in the list.

Figure 34 ZyXEL Utility: Add New Profile

3

Give the profile a descriptive name (of up to 32 printable ASCII characters). Select

Infrastructure and either manually enter or select the AP's SSID in the Scan

Info table and click Select.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

63

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4

Choose the same encryption method as the AP to which you want to connect (In this example, WPA-PSK).

Figure 35 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Security

5

This screen varies depending on the encryption method you selected in the previous screen. Enter the pre-shared key and leave the encryption type at the default setting.

Figure 36 ZyXEL Utility: Profile Encryption

6

In the next screen, leave both boxes selected.

Figure 37 Profile: Wireless Protocol Settings.

64

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

7

Verify the profile settings in the read-only screen. Click Save to save and go to the next screen.

Figure 38 Profile: Confirm Save

8

Click Activate Now to use the new profile immediately. Otherwise, click the

Activate Later button.

If you clicked Activate Later, you can select the profile from the list in the Profile screen and click Connect to activate it.

Note: Only one profile can be activated and used at any given time.

Figure 39 Profile: Activate

9

When you activate the new profile, the ZyXEL utility returns to the Link Info screen while it connects to the AP using your settings. When the wireless link is established, the ZyXEL utility icon in the system tray turns green and the Link

Info screen displays details of the active connection.

10

Open your Internet browser, enter http://www.zyxel.com

or the URL of any other web site in the address bar and press ENTER. If you are able to access the web site, your new profile is successfully configured.

11

If you cannot access the Internet go back to the Profile screen, select the profile you are using and click Edit. Check the details you entered previously. Also, refer to the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide or contact your network administrator if necessary.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

65

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4.3 Using NAT with Multiple Public IP Addresses

This chapter shows you examples of how to set up your ZyXEL Device if you have more than one fixed (static) IP address from your ISP.

4.3.1 Example Parameters and Scenario

The following table shows the public IP addresses from your ISP and your ZyXEL

Device’s LAN IP address.

Public IP Addresses

ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP

Address

1.2.3.4 to 1.2.3.7

192.168.1.1

The following figure shows the network you want to set up in this example.

• Assign the first public address (1.2.3.4) to the ZyXEL Device’s WAN port.

• Map the second and third public IP addresses (1.2.3.5 and 1.2.3.6) to the web and mail servers (192.168.1.12 and 192.168.1.13) respectively for traffic in both directions.

• Map the first public address (1.2.3.4) to outgoing traffic from other local computers.

• Map the first public address (1.2.3.4) to incoming traffic from the WAN.

• Forward FTP traffic using port 21 from the WAN to a specific local computer

(192.168.1.39).

• The last public IP address (1.2.3.7) is not mapped to any device and is reserved for future use.

Figure 40 Tutorial Example: Using NAT with Static Public IP Addresses

LAN FTP

192.168.1.39

192.168.1.39

Mapping rules:

192.168.1.12 <---> 1.2.3.5 (1-1)

WAN

192.168.1.13 <---> 1.2.3.6 (1-1)

Other outgoing LAN traffic ---> 1.2.3.4 (M-1)

Incoming traffic <--- 1.2.3.4 (Server)

FTP

Internet

192.168.1.1

1.2.3.4

1.2.3.5

1.2.3.6

1.2.3.7

Web

192.168.1.12

Mail

192.168.1.13

To set up this network, we are going to:

66

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

1

Configure the WAN connection to use the first public IP address (1.2.3.4).

2

Configure NAT address mapping for other public IP addresses (1.2.3.5 and

1.2.3.6).

3

Configure NAT port forwarding to forward FTP traffic from the WAN to a specific computer on your local network.

4.3.2 Configuring the WAN Connection with a Static IP

Address

The following table shows the information your ISP gave you for Internet connection.

Encapsulation

VPI/VCI

Public IP Addresses

Gateway IP Address

Subnet Mask

User Name

Password

DNS Server

PPPoE

8/33

1.2.3.4

1.2.3.5

1.2.3.6

1.2.3.7

1.2.3.89

255.255.255.0

exampleuser abcd1234

1.2.1.1

1.2.1.2

Follow the steps below to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access using

PPPoE in this example.

Figure 41 Tutorial Example: WAN Connection with a Static Public IP Address

LAN

WAN

Internet

192.168.1.1

1.2.3.4

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

67

Chapter 4 Tutorial

1

Click Network > WAN.

2

Make sure the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL Device) is pushed to the DSL side and the WAN mode is ADSL WAN.

3

Select Routing in the Mode field and select PPPoE from the Encapsulation drop-down list box.

4

Enter the information (such as the user name, password and VPI/VCI value) provided by your ISP. If your ISP didn’t give you the service name, leave the field blank.

5

In the IP Address section, select Static IP Address and enter the first fixed public IP address (“1.2.3.4” in this example).

6

Configure the IP address of the DNS server the ZyXEL Device can query to resolve domain names. Select UserDefined and enter the first and second DNS server’s

IP addresses given by your ISP.

68

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

7

Click Apply to save your changes.

Figure 42 Tutorial Example: WAN Screen

Chapter 4 Tutorial

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

69

Chapter 4 Tutorial

8

Go to the Status screen to check your WAN connection status. Make sure the status is not down.

Figure 43 Tutorial Example: Status

4.3.3 Public IP Address Mapping

To have the local computers and servers use specific WAN IP addresses, you need to map static public IP addresses to them.

Note: The one-to-one NAT address mapping rules are for both incoming and outgoing connections. The ZyXEL Device forwards traffic that is initiated from either the

LAN or the WAN to the destination IP address.

Note: The many-to-one or many-to-many NAT address mapping rules are for outgoing connections only. That means only traffic initiated from the LAN or returned packets are allowed to go through the ZyXEL Device.

In this example, you create two one-to-one rules to map the internal web server

(192.168.1.12) and mail server (192.168.1.13) to different static public IP addresses. The many-to-one rule maps a public IP address (1.2.3.4, that is, the

ZyXEL Device’s WAN IP address) to outgoing LAN traffic. It allows other local

70

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial computers on the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address to use this

IP address to access the Internet.

Figure 44 Tutorial Example: Mapping Multiple Public IP Addresses to Inside Servers

LAN

192.168.1.39

Mapping rules:

192.168.1.12 <---> 1.2.3.5 (1-1)

WAN

192.168.1.13 <---> 1.2.3.6 (1-1)

Other outgoing LAN traffic ---> 1.2.3.4 (M-1)

Internet

192.168.1.39

1.2.3.4

1.2.3.5

1.2.3.6

1.2.3.7

Web

192.168.1.12

Mail

192.168.1.13

Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. You should put any one-to-one rules before a many-to-one rule.

1

Click Network > NAT > General.

2

Enable NAT and select Full Feature as you have multiple public IP addresses to map to private IP addresses. Click Apply.

Figure 45 Tutorial Example: NAT > NAT Overview

3

Click the Address Mapping tab.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

71

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4

Click the first rule’s Edit icon ( ) in the Modify column to display the Edit

Address Mapping Rule screen.

Figure 46 Tutorial Example: NAT > Address Mapping

72

5

Map a public IP address to the web server.

Select the One-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.12 as the local start IP address and 1.2.3.5 as the global start IP address. Click Apply.

Figure 47 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: One-to-One (1)

6

Click the second rule’s Edit icon ( ).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

7

Map a public IP address to the mail server.

Select the One-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.13 as the local start IP address and 1.2.3.6 as the global start IP address. Click Apply.

Figure 48 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: One-to-One (2)

8

Click the third rule’s Edit icon ( ).

9

Map a public IP address to other outgoing LAN traffic.

Select the Many-to-One type and enter 192.168.1.1 as the local start IP address,

192.168.1.254 as the local end IP address and 1.2.3.4 as the global start IP address. Click Apply.

Figure 49 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: Many-to-One

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

73

Chapter 4 Tutorial

10

After the configurations, the Address Mapping screen looks as shown. You still have one IP address (1.2.3.7) that can be assigned to another internal server when you expand your network.

Figure 50 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Done

Note: To allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device, you

must also create a firewall rule. Refer to

Section 4.3.5 on page 75

for more information.

4.3.4 Forwarding Traffic from the WAN to a Local Computer

A server NAT address mapping rule allows computers behind the NAT be accessible to the outside world. To have the ZyXEL Device forward incoming traffic to a specific computer on your local network, you should also create a port forwarding (server mapping) rule.

In this example, you want to forward FTP traffic using port 21 to the computer with the IP address of 192.168.1.39.

Figure 51 Tutorial Example: Forwarding Incoming FTP Traffic to a Local Computer

LAN FTP

192.168.1.39

Mapping rules:

WAN

Incoming traffic <--- 1.2.3.4 (Server)

192.168.1.39

FTP

1.2.3.4

1.2.3.5

1.2.3.6

1.2.3.7

Internet

Web

192.168.1.12

Mail

192.168.1.13

74

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

1

Click Network > NAT > Address Mapping.

2

Click the forth rule’s Edit icon ( ) to configure a server rule.

Figure 52 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Edit: Server

Chapter 4 Tutorial

3

Select a number and click the Edit Details link to edit a port forwarding set.

4

Select FTP from the Service Name drop-down list box, and enter “192.168.1.39” as the server IP address. Click Add to add the rule to the table.

5

Click Apply to go back to the Edit Address Mapping Rule screen. Click Apply again.

Figure 53 Tutorial Example: NAT Port Forwarding

4.3.5 Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic through the Firewall

By default, the ZyXEL Device blocks any traffic initiated from the WAN to the LAN.

To have the ZyXEL Device forward traffic initiated from the WAN to a local computer or server on the LAN, you need to configure a firewall rule to allow it.

In this example, you create the firewall rules to allow traffic from the WAN to the following servers on the LAN:

• Web server

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

75

Chapter 4 Tutorial

• Mail server

• FTP server

Figure 54 Tutorial Example: Allow WAN-to-LAN Traffic

LAN FTP

192.168.1.39

WAN

FTP

Internet

192.168.1.39

Web

192.168.1.12

Mail

192.168.1.13

1

Click Security > Firewall.

2

Make sure the firewall is enabled and traffic from the WAN to the LAN is dropped.

Figure 55 Tutorial Example: Firewall > General

76

3

Go to the Rules screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4

Select the WAN to LAN packet direction and click the Add button to create a new firewall rule.

Figure 56 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rules: WAN to LAN

5

Configure a firewall rule to allow traffic from the WAN to the web server.

Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete.

Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter “192.168.1.12” and click Add >>.

Figure 57 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for Web

Server

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

77

Chapter 4 Tutorial

6

Select Any(All) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply.

Figure 58 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for Web Server

78

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

7

Click the Add button to configure a firewall rule to allow traffic from the WAN to the mail server.

Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete.

Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter “192.168.1.13” and click Add.

Figure 59 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for Mail Server

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

79

Chapter 4 Tutorial

8

Select Any(All) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply.

Figure 60 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for Mail Server

80

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

9

Click the Add button to configure a firewall rule to allow FTP traffic from the WAN to the FTP server.

Select Any in the Destination Address List box and click Delete.

Select Single Address as the destination address type. Enter “192.168.1.39” and click Add.

Figure 61 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Address Edit for FTP Server

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

81

Chapter 4 Tutorial

10

Select FTP(TCP:20,21) in the Available Services box on the left, and click Add

>> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. Click Apply.

Figure 62 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rule: WAN to LAN Service Edit for FTP Server

82

11

When you are done, the Rules screen looks as shown.

Figure 63 Tutorial Example: Firewall Rules Done

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

4.3.6 Testing the Connections

1

Open the web browser on one of the local computers and enter any web site’s URL in the address bar. If you can access the web site, your WAN connection and NAT address mapping are configured successfully. If you cannot access it, make sure you entered the correct information in the WAN and NAT Address Mapping screens. Also check that the Internet account is active and the computer’s IP address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device.

2

Open your web browser and try accessing the web server (1.2.3.5) from the outside network. If you cannot access the web server, make sure the NAT address mapping rule is configured correctly and there is a firewall rule to allow HTTP traffic from the WAN to the web server.

3

Try accessing the FTP server (1.2.3.4) from the outside network to send or retrieve a file. If you cannot access the FTP server, make sure the NAT port forwarding rule is active and there is a firewall rule to allow FTP traffic from the

WAN to FTP server.

4.4 Using NAT with Multiple Game Players

If two users (behind the ZyXEL Device) want to connect to the same server to play online games at the same time, but the server does not allow more than one login from the same IP address, you can configure a many-to-many rule instead of a many-to-one rule.

In this example, you have four static IP addresses (1.2.3.4 to 1.2.3.7) from your

ISP. After you set up your WAN connection (see

Section 4.3.2 on page 67 ), use

the NAT > Address Mapping screen to map the third and forth public IP addresses to the mail server (192.168.1.12) and web server (192.168.1.13) respectively. The first and second public IP addresses are mapped to other outgoing LAN traffic. See

Section 4.3.3 on page 70

for more information about IP address mapping.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

83

Chapter 4 Tutorial

When you finish configuration, the screen looks as shown.

Figure 64 Tutorial Example: NAT Address Mapping Done: Game Playing

Note: To allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device, you

must also create a firewall rule. Refer to

Section 4.3.5 on page 75

for more information.

4.5 How to Make a VoIP Call

You can register a SIP account with the SIP server and make voice calls over the

Internet to another VoIP device.

4.5.1 VoIP Calls With a Registered SIP Account

To use a registered SIP account, you should have applied for a SIP account with the VoIP service provider.

4.5.1.1 SIP Account Registration

Follow the steps below to register and activate your SIP account.

1

Make sure your ZyXEL Device is connected to the Internet.

2

Open the web configurator.

84

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 4 Tutorial

3

Go to the Status screen to check if your SIP account has been registered successfully. If registration failed, check your Internet connection and click

Register to register your SIP account again.

Figure 65 Tutorial Example: Status

4.5.1.2 Analog Phone Configuration

1

Click VoIP > Phone to open the Analog Phone screen.

2

Select Phone1 to configure the first phone port.

3

Select SIP1 from the SIP Account drop-down list box in the Outgoing Call Use section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) use the registered

SIP1 account to make outgoing calls.

4

Select the SIP1 check box in the Incoming Call apply to section to have the phone (connected to the first phone port) receive phone calls for the SIP1 account.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

85

Chapter 4 Tutorial

5

Click Apply to save your changes.

Figure 66 Tutorial Example: Analog Phone

4.5.1.3 Making a VoIP Call

1

Make sure you connect a telephone to the first phone port on the ZyXEL Device.

2

Make sure the ZyXEL Device is on and connected to the Internet.

3

Pick up the phone receiver.

4

Dial the VoIP phone number you want to call.

86

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

P

ART

II

Advanced

Status Screens (89)

WAN Setup (99)

LAN Setup (121)

Wireless LAN (137)

Network Address Translation (NAT) (169)

Voice (185)

Phone Usage (221)

Firewall (229)

Content Filtering (251)

VPN (257)

Certificates (291)

Static Route (321)

802.1Q/1P (325)

Quality of Service (QoS) (337)

Dynamic DNS Setup (353)

Remote Management Configuration (357)

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) (369)

87

88

C H A P T E R 5

Status Screens

Use the Status screens to look at the current status of the device, system resources, interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN), and SIP accounts. You can also register and unregister SIP accounts. The Status screen also provides detailed information from Any IP and DHCP and statistics from VoIP, and traffic.

5.1 Status Screen

Click Status to open this screen. The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL/WAN switch.

Figure 67 Status Screen (ADSL WAN mode)

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

89

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Figure 68 Status Screen (Ethernet WAN mode)

90

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 14 Status Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.

Apply Click this to update this screen immediately.

Device

Information

Host Name This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification. You can change this in the Maintenance > System >

General screen’s System Name field.

This is the model name of your device.

Model

Number

MAC

Address

ZyNOS

Firmware

Version

DSL

Firmware

Version

This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your ZyXEL Device.

This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device.

It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN.

This field displays the current version of the device’s DSL modem code.

WAN

Information

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Table 14 Status Screen

LABEL

DSL Mode

DESCRIPTION

This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN.

IP Address

This is the DSL standard that your ZyXEL Device is using.

This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the

WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.

IP Subnet

Mask

Default

Gateway

VPI/VCI

This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable.

This field is not available when the WAN mode is Ethernet WAN.

This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen.

LAN

Information

IP Address This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the

LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN.

IP Subnet

Mask

DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN.

Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays

DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients.

None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the

LAN.

Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

WLAN

Information

SSID

Channel

Security

WPS

This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in the wireless LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now.

This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN.

This displays the status of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

Security

Firewall

Content

Filter

System Status

This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Device’s firewall is activated.

Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

This displays whether or not the ZyXEL Device’s content filtering is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

91

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Table 14 Status Screen

LABEL

System

Uptime

Current

Date/Time

System

Mode

CPU Usage

Memory

Usage

DESCRIPTION

This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Tools > Restart), or when you reset it

(see

Section 1.5 on page 29 ).

This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can change this in Maintenance > System > Time Setting.

This displays whether the ZyXEL Device is functioning as a router or a bridge.

This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the

ZyXEL Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications.

This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See

Section 25.4 on page 426 , or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few

seconds.

Interface Status

Interface

Status

This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has.

This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface.

For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down

(line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial

(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using

PPPoE encapsulation.

Rate

For the WAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface.

For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and Down when the ZyXEL Device is not using the interface.

For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or

InActive when WLAN is disabled.

For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.

For the WAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.

For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.

For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled.

Summary

Client List

Click this link to view current DHCP client information. See Section 7.3 on page 126 .

92

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Table 14 Status Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

AnyIP Table Click this link to view a list of IP addresses and MAC addresses of computers, which are not in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. See

Section 5.2 on page 94

.

WLAN

Status

Click this link to display the MAC address(es) of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the ZyXEL Device. See

Section 5.3 on page 94 .

VPN Status Click this link to view the ZyXEL Device’s current VPN connections. See

Section 14.7 on page 275 .

Packet

Statistics

Click this link to view port status and packet specific statistics. See

Section 5.4 on page 95

.

VoIP

Statistics

Click this link to view statistics about your VoIP usage. See

Section 5.5 on page 97 .

VoIP Status

Account

Registration

This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device.

This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You have to register SIP accounts with a SIP server to use VoIP.

URI

If the SIP account is already registered with the SIP server,

• Click Unregister to delete the SIP account’s registration in the SIP server. This does not cancel your SIP account, but it deletes the mapping between your SIP identity and your IP address or domain name.

• The second field displays Registered.

If the SIP account is not registered with the SIP server,

• Click Register to have the ZyXEL Device attempt to register the SIP account with the SIP server.

• The second field displays the reason the account is not registered.

Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >

SIP > SIP Settings.

Register Fail - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the

ZyXEL Device or when you activate it.

This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

93

Chapter 5 Status Screens

5.2 Any IP Table

Click Status > AnyIP Table to access this screen. Use this screen to view the IP address and MAC address of each computer that is using the ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device.

Figure 69 Any IP Table

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 15 Any IP Table

LABEL

#

IP Address

DESCRIPTION

This field is a sequential value. It is not associated with a specific entry.

MAC Address

Refresh

This field displays the IP address of each computer that is using the ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device.

This field displays the MAC address of the computer that is using the

ZyXEL Device but is in a different subnet than the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to update this screen.

5.3 WLAN Status

Click Status > WLAN Status to access this screen. Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the ZyXEL Device.

Figure 70 WLAN Status

94

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 5 Status Screens

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 16 WLAN Status

LABEL

#

DESCRIPTION

This is the index number of an associated wireless station.

MAC Address This field displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address of an associated wireless station.

Association

TIme

Refresh

This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the

ZyXEL Device.

Click Refresh to reload this screen.

5.4 Packet Statistics

Click Status > Packet Statistics to access this screen. Read-only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics. Also provided are "system up time" and "poll interval(s)". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable. The screen varies slightly depending on the WAN mode you set using the DSL/WAN switch.

Figure 71 Packet Statistics

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

95

Chapter 5 Status Screens

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 17 Packet Statistics

LABEL

System Monitor

DESCRIPTION

System up Time This is the elapsed time the system has been up.

Current Date/

Time

This field displays your ZyXEL Device’s present date and time.

CPU Usage

Memory Usage

This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization.

This field specifies the percentage of memory utilization.

WAN Port Statistics

Link Status This is the status of your WAN link.

WAN IP Address This is the IP address of the ZyXEL Device’s WAN port.

Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your ZyXEL Device DSL interface.

This is the downstream speed of your ZyXEL Device DSL interface.

Downstream

Speed

Rate

Node-Link

This is the port speed and duplex setting of your Ethernet WAN connection.

This field displays the remote node index number and link type. Link types are Ethernet and PPPoE.

Status

TxPkts

RxPkts

Errors

Tx B/s

Rx B/s

Up Time

This field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up

(line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation.

This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port.

This field displays the number of packets received on this port.

This field displays the number of error packets on this port.

This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second.

This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second.

This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up.

LAN Port Statistics

Interface This field displays Ethernet (LAN ports).

Status

TxPkts

RxPkts

Collisions

Poll Interval(s)

Set Interval

Stop

This displays the port speed and duplex setting.

This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this interface.

This field displays the number of packets received on this interface.

This is the number of collisions on this interfaces.

Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics.

Click this to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll

Interval field above.

Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics.

96

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

5.5 VoIP Statistics

Click Status > VoIP Statistics to access this screen.

Figure 72 VoIP Statistics

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 18 VoIP Statistics

LABEL

SIP Status

Account

Registration

DESCRIPTION

This column displays each SIP account in the ZyXEL Device.

This field displays the current registration status of the SIP account. You can change this in the Status screen.

Last

Registration

URI

Protocol

Message

Waiting

Last Incoming

Number

Registered - The SIP account is registered with a SIP server.

Register Fail - The last time the ZyXEL Device tried to register the SIP account with the SIP server, the attempt failed. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to register the SIP account when you turn on the

ZyXEL Device or when you activate it.

Inactive - The SIP account is not active. You can activate it in VoIP >

SIP > SIP Settings.

This field displays the last time you successfully registered the SIP account. It displays N/A if you never successfully registered this account.

This field displays the account number and service domain of the SIP account. You can change these in VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings.

This field displays the transport protocol the SIP account uses. SIP accounts always use UDP.

This field indicates whether or not there are any messages waiting for the SIP account.

This field displays the last number that called the SIP account. It displays N/A if no number has ever dialed the SIP account.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

97

Chapter 5 Status Screens

Table 18 VoIP Statistics

LABEL

Last Outgoing

Number

Call Statistics

Phone

Hook

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the last number the SIP account called. It displays N/

A if the SIP account has never dialed a number.

This field displays each phone port in the ZyXEL Device.

This field indicates whether the phone is on the hook or off the hook.

On - The phone is hanging up or already hung up.

Status

Off - The phone is dialing, calling, or connected.

This field displays the current state of the phone call.

N/A - There are no current VoIP calls, incoming calls or outgoing calls being made.

DIAL - The callee’s phone is ringing.

RING - The phone is ringing for an incoming VoIP call.

Process - There is a VoIP call in progress.

Codec

Peer Number

DISC - The callee’s line is busy, the callee hung up or your phone was left off the hook.

This field displays what voice codec is being used for a current VoIP call through a phone port.

This field displays the SIP number of the party that is currently engaged in a VoIP call through a phone port.

This field displays how long the current call has lasted.

Duration

Tx Pkts

Rx Pkts

Tx B/s

Rx B/s

This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has transmitted in the current call.

This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has received in the current call.

This field displays how quickly the ZyXEL Device has transmitted packets in the current call. The rate is the average number of bytes transmitted per second.

This field displays how quickly the ZyXEL Device has received packets in the current call. The rate is the average number of bytes transmitted per second.

Poll Interval(s) Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen, and click Set Interval.

Set Interval

Stop

Click this to make the ZyXEL Device update the screen based on the amount of time you specified in Poll Interval.

Click this to make the ZyXEL Device stop updating the screen.

98

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 6

WAN Setup

6.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Device’s WAN screens. Use these screens to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access.

A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local

Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.

Figure 73 LAN and WAN

LAN

WAN

Internet

6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens

• Use the Internet Access Setup screen ( Section 6.2 on page 101 ) to configure

the WAN settings on the ZyXEL Device for Internet access.

• Use the More Connections screen (

Section 6.3 on page 105

) to set up additional Internet access connections.

• Use the WAN Backup Setup screen (

Section 6.4 on page 112

) to set up a backup gateway that helps forward traffic to its destination when the default

WAN connection is down.

99

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN

Encapsulation Method

Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your

ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication.

WAN IP Address

The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the

Internet.

If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method).

Finding Out More

• See

Section 6.5 on page 113

for advanced technical information on WAN.

• See

Chapter 4 on page 57 for WAN tutorials.

6.1.3 Before You Begin

You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP.

100

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.2 The Internet Access Setup Screen

Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s WAN settings. Click Network >

WAN > Internet Access Setup. The screen differs by the WAN mode and encapsulation you select.

Figure 74 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (PPPoE)

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

101

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 19 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup

LABEL

WAN Mode

DESCRIPTION

When you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL

Device) to the DSL side, this shows ADSL WAN. The WAN port will be disabled automatically.

When you set the DSL/WAN switch (on the back of the ZyXEL

Device) to the WAN side, this shows Ethernet WAN. The DSL port will be disabled automatically. This allows the ZyXEL Device to work as an Ethernet gateway, instead of a DSL router. To access the Internet, connect the WAN port to a broadband modem or router.

General

Mode

Encapsulation

This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN.

Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an

Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select

Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the ZyXEL

Device.

Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the dropdown list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the

Mode field.

User Name

Password

If you select Bridge in the Mode field, the ZyXEL Device uses RFC

1483.

If you select Routing in the Mode field, select DHCP (ENET ENCAP) or PPPoE.

(PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

(PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above.

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.

This field is not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN.

Service Name

Multiplexing

Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the dropdown list. Choices are VC or LLC.

Virtual Circuit ID These fields are not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet

WAN.

VPI

VCI

VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information.

The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.

The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.

IP Address

102

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 19 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup (continued)

LABEL

IP Address

DESCRIPTION

This option is available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN or select Routing in the Mode field.

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.

Subnet Mask

Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic

IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below.

Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation when you select

DHCP in the Encapsulation field.

You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you select DHCP in the Encapsulation field.

Gateway IP address

DNS Server

First DNS Server

Second DNS

Server

Third DNS Server

Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address) and you select Obtain an IP Address Automatically.

Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose

UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to

User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second

UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply.

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. You must have another DNS server on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

Connection

(PPPoE encapsulation only)

Nailed-Up

Connection

Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.

Connect on

Demand

Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field.

Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout.

Apply

Cancel

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

103

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.2.1 Advanced Internet Access Setup

Use this screen to edit your ZyXEL Device's advanced WAN settings. Click the

Advanced Setup button in the Internet Access Setup screen. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 75 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup

104

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 20 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup

LABEL

RIP & Multicast

Setup

RIP Direction

DESCRIPTION

This section is not available when you configure the ZyXEL Device to be in bridge mode.

RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the ZyXEL Device sends and receives on the subnet.

RIP Version

Multicast

Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.

This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field.

Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M.

Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets sent to every computer).

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 20 Network > WAN > Internet Access Setup: Advanced Setup (continued)

LABEL

ATM QoS

DESCRIPTION

ATM QoS Type These fields are not available if you set the WAN mode to Ethernet

WAN.

Peak Cell

Rate

Sustain Cell

Rate

Maximum

Burst Size

MTU

Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select VBR-RT

(real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.

Select VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.

Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the

Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.

The Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR.

Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.

Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.

The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field.

Back

Apply

Cancel

For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.

For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.

For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.3 The More Connections Screen

The ZyXEL Device allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure additional Internet access connections click Network >

WAN > More Connections. The screen differs by the encapsulation you select.

When you use the WAN > Internet Access Setup screen to set up Internet

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

105

Chapter 6 WAN Setup access, you are configuring the first WAN connection. This screen is not available if you set the WAN type to Ethernet in the Internet Access Setup screen.

Figure 76 Network > WAN > More Connections

106

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 21 Network > WAN > More Connections

LABEL

#

Active

DESCRIPTION

This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection.

This field indicates whether the connection is active or not.

Name

VPI/VCI

Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it.

This is the name you gave to the Internet connection.

This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel

Identifier (VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection.

Encapsulation This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection.

Modify The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the WAN >

Internet Access Setup screen to edit it.

Apply

Cancel

Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup.

Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.3.1 More Connections Edit

Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to configure a connection

.

Figure 77 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 22 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit

LABEL

Active

Name

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection.

Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

107

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 22 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued)

LABEL

Mode

DESCRIPTION

Select Routing from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account.

Encapsulation

If you select Bridge, the ZyXEL Device will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded.

Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field.

User Name

Password

Service Name

Multiplexing

VPI

VCI

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway IP address

If you select Bridge in the Mode field, select either PPPoA or

RFC 1483.

If you select Routing in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC

1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above.

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here.

Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC.

By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol.

For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols.

The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.

The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.

This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field.

A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet.

If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select

Obtain an IP Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below.

If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field.

Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.

Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP).

108

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 22 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit (continued)

LABEL

Connection

DESCRIPTION

Nailed-Up Connection Select Nailed-Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time. The ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected.

Connect on Demand Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle

Timeout field.

Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time-out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand. The default setting is 0, which means the Internet session will not timeout.

NAT SUA only is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.

Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Click Edit to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Advanced Setup

Otherwise, select None to disable NAT.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Click this button to display the More Connections Advanced

Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

109

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup

To edit your ZyXEL Device's advanced WAN settings, click the Advanced Setup button in the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 78 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup

110

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 23 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

RIP & Multicast Setup This section is not available when you configure the ZyXEL Device to be in bridge mode.

RIP Direction

RIP Version

Multicast

Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out

Only.

Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The

ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and

IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it.

ATM QoS

ATM QoS Type Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic.

Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are nontime sensitive, such as e-mail.

Select VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.

Select VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 23 Network > WAN > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued)

LABEL

Peak Cell Rate

DESCRIPTION

Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.

Sustain Cell Rate The Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (longterm) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.

Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.

MTU The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the

MTU in this field.

Back

Apply

Cancel

For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500.

For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492.

For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

111

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.4 The WAN Backup Setup Screen

Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device’s WAN backup. Click Network >

WAN > WAN Backup Setup. This screen is not available if you set the WAN type to Ethernet in the Internet Access Setup screen.

Figure 79 Network > WAN > WAN Backup

112

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 24 Network > WAN > WAN Backup

LABEL

Backup Type

DESCRIPTION

Select the method that the ZyXEL Device uses to check the DSL connection.

Check WAN IP

Address1-3

Select DSL Link to have the ZyXEL Device check if the connection to the

DSLAM is up. Select ICMP to have the ZyXEL Device periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields.

Configure this field to test your ZyXEL Device's WAN accessibility. Type the IP address of a reliable nearby computer (for example, your ISP's

DNS server address).

Fail Tolerance

Note: If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup, you must configure at least one IP address here.

When using a WAN backup connection, the ZyXEL Device periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection (if configured) if there is no response.

Type the number of times (2 recommended) that your ZyXEL Device may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection (or a different WAN backup connection).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Table 24 Network > WAN > WAN Backup

LABEL

Recovery

Interval

DESCRIPTION

When the ZyXEL Device is using a lower priority connection (usually a

WAN backup connection), it periodically checks whether or not it can use a higher priority connection.

Timeout

Type the number of seconds (30 recommended) for the ZyXEL Device to wait between checks. Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic.

Type the number of seconds (3 recommended) for your ZyXEL Device to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check

WAN IP Address field before timing out the request. The WAN connection is considered "down" after the ZyXEL Device times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field. Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested.

Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL

Device cannot connect to the Internet.

Active Traffic

Redirect

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down.

Metric

Backup

Gateway

Apply

Cancel

Note: If you activate traffic redirect, you must configure at least one

Check WAN IP Address.

This field sets this route's priority among the routes the ZyXEL Device uses.

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest

"cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the "cost".

Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation.

The ZyXEL Device automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the

ZyXEL Device's Internet connection terminates.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

6.5 WAN Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

6.5.1 Encapsulation

Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device supports the following methods.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

113

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.5.1.1 ENET ENCAP

The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get this information from your ISP.

6.5.1.2 PPP over Ethernet

The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, and so on.) connection.

The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.

For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS).

One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.

Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.

By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.

6.5.1.3 PPPoA

PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A

PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC

(Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (Digital

Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.

6.5.1.4 RFC 1483

RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM

Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit (LLC-based multiplexing) and the second

114

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit

(VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information.

6.5.2 Multiplexing

There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.

VC-based Multiplexing

In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, and so on. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM

VCs is fast and economical.

LLC-based Multiplexing

In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.

6.5.3 VPI and VCI

Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel

Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.

6.5.4 IP Address Assignment

A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET

ENCAP gateway.

IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation

If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP

Address field and not the Gateway IP Address field.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

115

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation

In this case the IP address assignment must be static.

IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation

In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP.

However for a dynamic IP, the ZyXEL Device acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable

(N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the ZyXEL Device.

6.5.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP)

A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The ZyXEL Device does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the ZyXEL Device will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons.

Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flatrate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern.

6.5.6 NAT

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.

6.5.7 Metric

The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of "1" for directly connected networks. The number must be between "1" and "15"; a number greater than "15" means the link is down. The smaller the number, the lower the

"cost".

The metric sets the priority for the ZyXEL Device’s routes to the Internet. For example, if the normal route has a metric of "1" and the traffic-redirect route has a metric of "2", then the normal route acts as the primary default route. If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet, the ZyXEL Device tries the trafficredirect route next.

116

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.5.8 Traffic Shaping

Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.

Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum

PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed.

Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.

Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.

If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate.

The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.

Figure 80 Example of Traffic Shaping

6.5.8.1 ATM Traffic Classes

These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic

Management 4.0 Specification.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

117

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice.

Variable Bit Rate (VBR)

The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections.

Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections.

The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.

The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.

Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)

The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers.

However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer.

118

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

6.6 Traffic Redirect

Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the ZyXEL Device cannot connect to the Internet. An example is shown in the figure below.

Figure 81 Traffic Redirect Example

LAN

WAN

Internet

Backup Gateway

The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN. Use IP alias to configure the

LAN into two or three logical networks with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. Put the protected LAN in one subnet (Subnet 1 in the following figure) and the backup gateway in another subnet (Subnet 2). Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN (Subnet 1) to the backup gateway (Subnet 2).

Figure 82 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup

Subnet 1

192.168.1.0 - 192.168.1.24

WAN

LAN

Internet

Backup Gateway

Subnet 2

192.168.2.0 - 192.168.2.24

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

119

Chapter 6 WAN Setup

120

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 7

LAN Setup

7.1 Overview

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.

The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.

LAN

DSL

Internet

• See

Section 7.5 on page 129

for more information on LANs.

• See

Appendix C on page 495

for more information on IP addresses and subnetting.

7.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens

• Use the LAN IP screen (

Section 7.2 on page 122

) to set the LAN IP address and subnet mask of your ZyXEL device. You can also edit your ZyXEL Device's RIP, multicast, any IP, DHCP, and Windows Networking settings from this screen.

• Use the Client List screen ( Section 7.3 on page 126 ) to assign IP addresses on

the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.

• Use the IP Alias screen ( Section 7.4 on page 128 ) to change your ZyXEL

Device’s IP alias settings.

121

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

7.1.2 What You Need To Know About LAN

IP Address

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. This is known as an

Internet Protocol address.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your

ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

DHCP

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) allows clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. This ZyXEL Device has a built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.

DNS

DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.

7.1.3 Before You Begin

Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen.

7.2 The LAN IP Screen

Click Network > LAN to open the IP screen. See

Section 7.1 on page 121 for

background information. Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address

122

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup and subnet mask of your ZyXEL Device and configure the DNS server information that the ZyXEL Device sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN.

Figure 83 Network > LAN > IP

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 25 Network > LAN > IP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

LAN TCP/IP

IP Address Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).

IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so.

DHCP Setup

DHCP If set to Server, your ZyXEL Device can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to LAN computers and other devices that are DHCP clients.

If set to None, the DHCP server will be disabled. You need to manually configure the IP addresses of the computers and other devices on your

LAN.

If set to Relay, the ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case.

When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

123

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

Table 25 Network > LAN > IP (continued)

LABEL

IP Pool Starting

Address

Pool Size

Remote DHCP

Server

DNS Server

DNS Servers

Assigned by

DHCP Server

First DNS Server

DESCRIPTION

This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.

This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.

If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here.

The ZyXEL Device passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP clients.

Select Obtained From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the ZyXEL Device's WAN IP address).

Second DNS

Server

Third DNS Server

Select UserDefined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose

UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to

UserDefined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-

Defined changes to None after you click Apply.

Select DNS Relay to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DNS proxy only when the ISP uses IPCP DNS server extensions.

The ZyXEL Device's

LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The ZyXEL

Device tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the ZyXEL Device itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device forwards the query to the real

DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to None after you click Apply.

Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. You must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.

Apply

Cancel

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup.

7.2.1 The Advanced LAN Setup Screen

RIP

RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers.

124

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

Multicast and IGMP

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).

Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.

There are two versions 1 and 2. IGMP version 2 is an improvement over version 1 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.

7.2.2 Configuring the Advanced LAN Setup Screen

Use this screen to edit your ZyXEL Device's RIP, multicast, Any IP, and Windows

Networking settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 84 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 26 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

RIP & Multicast Setup

RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only.

RIP Version

Multicast

Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP-2B and RIP-2M.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP-v2. Select None to disable it.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

125

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

Table 26 Network > LAN > IP > Advanced Setup (continued)

LABEL

Any IP Setup

DESCRIPTION

Enable Any IP to allow a computer to access the Internet without changing its network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask), even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet.

Windows

Networking

(NetBIOS over

TCP/IP)

Allow between

LAN and WAN

Back

Apply

Cancel

When you disable Any IP, only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address can connect to the ZyXEL Device or access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device.

NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow

NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN.

Select this to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.

Clear this option to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the

WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the changes.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.3 The LAN Client List Screen

Use this table to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.

126

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

Click Network > LAN > Client List to open the following screen. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s static DHCP settings.

Figure 85 Network > LAN > Client List

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 27 Network > LAN > Client List

LABEL

IP Address

MAC Address

Add

#

Status

Host Name

IP Address

MAC Address

DESCRIPTION

Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your

LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.

Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.

Click Add to add a static DHCP entry.

This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).

This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device.

This field displays the computer host name.

This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.

The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local

Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).

Reserve

Modify

Apply

Cancel

Refresh

A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.

Select the check box in the heading row to automatically select all check boxes or select the check box(es) in each entry to have the

ZyXEL Device always assign the selected entry(ies)’s IP address(es) to the corresponding MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). You can select up to 128 entries in this table.

Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

127

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

7.4 The LAN IP Alias Screen

IP alias partitions a physical network into different logical networks over the same

Ethernet interface. The ZyXEL Device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the ZyXEL Device itself as the gateway for each LAN network. With IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN's logical networks (subnets). The following figure shows a

LAN divided into subnets A, B, and C.

Figure 86 Physical Network & Partitioned Logical Networks

Ethernet

Interface

A: 192.168.1.1 - 192.168.1.24

B: 192.168.2.1 - 192.168.2.24

C: 192.168.3.1 - 192.168.3.24

Note: Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap.

Click Network > LAN > IP Alias to open the following screen. Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s IP alias settings.

Figure 87 Network > LAN > IP Alias

128

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 28 Network > LAN > IP Alias

LABEL

IP Alias 1, 2

IP Address

DESCRIPTION

Select this to configure another LAN network for the ZyXEL Device.

Enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation.

IP Subnet Mask Your ZyXEL Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device.

RIP Direction

Alternatively, click the right mouse button to copy and/or paste the IP address.

RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP

Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets.

Select the RIP direction from Both/In Only/Out Only/None. When set to Both or Out Only, the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically. When set to Both or In Only, it will incorporate the

RIP information that it receives; when set to None, it will not send any

RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received.

RIP Version

Apply

Cancel

The RIP Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on non-router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. By default, RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to

RIP-1.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.5 LAN Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

129

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

7.5.1 LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device

The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are

LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next.

Figure 88 LAN and WAN IP Addresses

LAN WAN

Internet

7.5.2 DHCP Setup

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

IP Pool

The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.

7.5.3 DNS Server Addresses

DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.

There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.

130

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen.

• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ZyXEL Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.

If the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen are set to DNS Relay, the

ZyXEL Device tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server. When a computer sends a DNS query to the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device acts as a

DNS proxy and forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer.

Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen.

7.5.4 TCP/IP

The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems on the LAN that support DHCP client capability.

IP Address and Subnet Mask

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.

If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the

Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL Device. The Internet

Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise.

Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

131

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your

ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

Private IP Addresses

Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet

Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255

• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255

• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255

You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.

Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private

Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.

7.5.5 RIP Setup

RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

Both - the ZyXEL Device will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives.

In Only - the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received.

Out Only - the ZyXEL Device will send out RIP packets but will not accept any

RIP packets received.

132

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

None - the ZyXEL Device will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received.

The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the ZyXEL Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving).

RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology.

Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting.

7.5.6 Multicast

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).

Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.

IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections

4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address

224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.

The ZyXEL Device supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2

(IGMP-v2). At start up, the ZyXEL Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the ZyXEL Device periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the ZyXEL Device LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.

7.5.7 Any IP

Traditionally, you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the ZyXEL Device to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet (through the ZyXEL Device). In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network, you may need to manually

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

133

Chapter 7 LAN Setup configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the

Internet via the ZyXEL Device.

With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled, the ZyXEL Device allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the

ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet. Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static (fixed) IP address, you can simply connect the computer to the

ZyXEL Device and access the Internet.

The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a

ZyXEL Device is installed, you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet.

Figure 89 Any IP Example

Internet

192.168.10.1

134

Internet

192.168.1.1

192.168.10.1

The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s IP address.

Note: You must enable NAT/SUA to use the Any IP feature on the ZyXEL Device.

How Any IP Works

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access

Control or MAC address, on the local area network. IP routing table is defined on

IP Ethernet devices (the ZyXEL Device) to decide which hop to use, to help forward data along to its specified destination.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

The following lists out the steps taken, when a computer tries to access the

Internet for the first time through the ZyXEL Device.

1

When a computer (which is in a different subnet) first attempts to access the

Internet, it sends packets to its default gateway (which is not the ZyXEL Device) by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table.

2

When the computer cannot locate the default gateway, an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN.

3

The ZyXEL Device receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address.

4

The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table.

Once the ARP table is updated, the computer is able to access the Internet through the ZyXEL Device.

5

When the ZyXEL Device receives packets from the computer, it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer.

After all the routing information is updated, the computer can access the ZyXEL

Device and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

135

Chapter 7 LAN Setup

136

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 8

Wireless LAN

8.1 Overview

The blue circle marks a wireless LAN in the following figure. Wireless clients (A and

B) connect to an access point (AP) to access other devices (such as the printer) or the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device works as an AP when you install a compatible

WLAN card.

Figure 90 Example of a Wireless Network

Ethernet

AP

A

B

8.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens

This chapter describes the ZyXEL Device’s Network > Wireless LAN screens.

Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device’s wireless connection.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

137

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

• Use the AP screen (see

Section 8.2 on page 140

) to turn the wireless connection on or off, set up wireless security, configure the MAC filter, set up

Quality of Service and make other basic configuration changes.

• Use the Wireless LAN: Advanced Setup screen (see

Section 8.2.5 on page

148 ) to change the wireless mode, and make other advanced wireless

configuration changes.

• Use the More AP screen (see Section 8.3 on page 149 ) to set up multiple

wireless networks on your ZyXEL Device.

• Use the MAC Filter screen (see

Section 8.4 on page 151

) to configure a MAC

(Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network.

• Use the WPS screen and the WPS Station screen to use WiFi Protected Setup

(WPS). WPS lets you set up a secure network quickly, when connecting to other

WPS-enabled devices.

Use the WPS screen (see

Section 8.5 on page 152 ) to enable or disable WPS,

generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the ZyXEL Device’s WPS status.

Use the WPS Station (see

Section 8.6 on page 153

) screen to set up WPS by pressing a button or using a PIN.

• Use the WDS screen (see Section 8.7 on page 154 ) to set up a Wireless

Distribution System, in which the ZyXEL Device acts as a bridge with other

ZyXEL access points.

• Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 8.8 on page 156 ) to schedule a time

period for the wireless LAN to operate each day.

You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and some security in the AP screen.

8.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless

Wireless Basics

• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same Service Set

IDentity (SSID).

The SSID is the name of the wireless network.

• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels.

Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.

Wireless Network Construction

Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.

• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.

138

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.

• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a network’s range.

Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.

• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.

• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information.

Security

Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.Use the strongest security that every wireless client in the wireless network supports.

Table 29 Wireless Security Levels

SECURITY

LEVEL

Weakest

SECURITY TYPE

No Security

MAC Address Filtering

WEP Encryption

IEEE 802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server

Authentication

WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared

Key)

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

WPA-PSK2

WPA2

Strongest

Note: WPA2 or WPA2-PSK security is recommended.

• WPA2-PSK and WPA-PSK do not employ user authentication and are known as the personal version of WPA.

• WEP is better than no security, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly.

MAC Address Filter

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address consists of twelve hexadecimal characters (0-9, and A to F), and it is usually written in the following format: “0A:A0:00:BB:CC:DD”.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

139

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

The MAC address filter controls access to the wireless network. You can use the

MAC address of each wireless client to allow or deny access to the wireless network.

Finding Out More

• See

Chapter 4 on page 57 for a tutorial showing how to set up your wireless

connection in an example scenario.

• See

Section 8.9 on page 157

for advanced technical information on wireless networks.

8.1.3 Before You Start

Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See

Section 8.1.2 on page 138

if some of the terms used here do not make sense to you.

• What wireless standards do the other wireless devices support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?

• What security options do the other wireless devices support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the best one to use?

• Do the other wireless devices support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily.

Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do.

• What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them alone.

8.2 AP Screen

Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device’s SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL

Device’s new settings.

140

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the AP screen.

Figure 91 Network > Wireless LAN > AP

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP

LABEL

Active

Wireless LAN

Network

Name (SSID)

DESCRIPTION

Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.

The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.

Hide SSID

Auto-Scan

Channel

Channel

Selection

Scan

Security

Mode

Apply

Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL

Device’s SSID or WEP settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the

ZyXEL Device’s new settings.

Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.

Select this option and click Apply to have the ZyXEL Device scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device. The ZyXEL Device automatically scans for and selects a channel whenever the device reboots or the wireless setting is changed.

Select this option and set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region. Select a channel from the drop-down list box.

Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device immediately scan for and select a channel which is not used by another device.

See the following sections for more details about this field.

Static WEP, WPA and WPA2 are available only when WPS is disabled.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

141

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > AP (continued)

LABEL

Cancel

Advanced

Setup

DESCRIPTION

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WLAN setup.

8.2.1 No Security

Select No Security to allow wireless devices to communicate with the access points without any data encryption.

Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.

Figure 92 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: No Security

142

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.2.2 WEP Encryption

In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.

Figure 93 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP Encryption

The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.

Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: Static WEP Encryption

LABEL

Security

Mode

Passphrase

DESCRIPTION

Choose Static WEP from the drop-down list box.

WEP Key

Enter a passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and clicking Generate.

The ZyXEL Device automatically generates a WEP key.

The WEP key is used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL Device and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.

If you want to manually set the WEP key, enter any 5 or 13 characters

(ASCII string) or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for a 64bit or 128-bit WEP key respectively.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

143

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.2.3 WPA(2)-PSK

In order to configure and enable WPA(2)-PSK authentication; click Network >

Wireless LAN to display the AP screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.

Figure 94 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK

144

The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.

Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Security Mode Choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.

WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2-PSK. Select this if you want the

ZyXEL Device to support WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.

Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.

Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters

(including spaces and symbols).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)-PSK

LABEL

ReAuthentication

Timer (in seconds)

DESCRIPTION

Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Idle Timeout

Group Key

Update Timer

Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.

The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).

The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using

WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using

WPAWPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients.

The re-keying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in

WPA(2)-PSK mode. The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

145

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication Screen

In order to configure and enable WPA authentication; click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the AP screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from the

Security Mode list.

Figure 95 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)

146

The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.

Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Security Mode Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.

WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL

Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > AP: WPA(2)

LABEL

ReAuthentication

Timer (in seconds)

DESCRIPTION

Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between

10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.

Idle Timeout

Group Key

Update Timer

The ZyXEL Device automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or

1 hour).

The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using

WPA(2)-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA(2) key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The rekeying process is the WPA(2) equivalent of automatically changing the

WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis.

Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in

WPA(2)-PSK mode. The ZyXEL Device default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).

Authentication Server

IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.

Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812.

You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.

Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL

Device.

The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network.

Accounting Server (optional)

IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.

Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813.

You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.

Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the ZyXEL Device.

The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your

ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

147

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.2.5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup

To configure advanced wireless settings, click the Advanced Setup button in the

AP screen. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 96 Network > Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup

148

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > AP > Advanced Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Wireless Advanced Setup

Enter a value between 0 and 2432. RTS/CTS

Threshold

Fragmentation

Threshold

Output Power

Level

Preamble

802.11 Mode

It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2432.

Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device in this field. The higher the number, the greater the output power. If there is a high density of APs in the area, decrease the output power of the ZyXEL Device to reduce interference with other APs. See the product specifications for more information on your ZyXEL Device’s output power.

Select a preamble type. Choices are Long, Short or Dynamic. The default setting is Long. See the appendix for more information.

Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.

Select Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant

WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced.

Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.3 More AP Screen

This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL

Device.

Click Network > Wireless LAN > More AP. The following screen displays.

Figure 97 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP

LABEL

#

Active

SSID

DESCRIPTION

This is the index number of each SSID profile.

Select the check box to activate an SSID profile.

An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL

Device’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service

Set with which a wireless device is associated.

Security

Modify

Apply

Cancel

This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.

This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.

Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.

Click the Remove icon to delete the SSID profile.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

149

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.3.1 More AP Edit

Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the

More AP screen. The following screen displays.

Figure 98 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP > Edit

150

See Appendix E on page 531 for a list of commonly-used services and destination

ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > More AP > Edit

LABEL

Network Name

(SSID)

DESCRIPTION

The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.

Hide SSID

Security Mode

MAC Filter

Edit

Back

Apply

Cancel

Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the

ZyXEL Device’s SSID or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device’s new settings.

Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.

See Section 8.2 on page 140 for more details about this field.

This shows whether the wireless devices with the MAC addresses listed are allowed or denied to access the ZyXEL Device using this

SSID.

Click this button to go to the MAC Filter screen to configure MAC

filter settings. See Section 8.4 on page 151 for more details.

Click this to return to the previous screen without saving changes.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.4 MAC Filter

Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings. Click Network

> Wireless LAN > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 99 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter

LABEL

Active MAC

Filter

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering.

Filter Action

Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.

Set

Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device

Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device.

This is the index number of the MAC address.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

151

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter

LABEL

MAC

Address

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

8.5 WPS

Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device.

WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection

between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Appendix D on page

507 for more information about WPS.

Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS. The following screen displays.

Figure 100 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS

152

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS

LABEL

WPS Setup

Enable WPS

PIN Number

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device.

This shows the PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ZyXEL

Device. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.

The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Table 38 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS

LABEL

Generate

WPS Status

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to have the ZyXEL Device create a new PIN.

This displays Configured when the ZyXEL Device has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen.

Release_Co nfiguration

Apply

Refresh

This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the ZyXEL Device or you click

Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings.

This button is available when the WPS status is Configured.

Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Refresh to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

8.6 WPS Station

Use this screen to set up a WPS wireless network using either Push Button

Configuration (PBC) or PIN Configuration.

Click Network > Wireless LAN >WPS Station. The following screen displays.

Figure 101 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

153

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 39 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station

LABEL

Push Button

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Push Button on this screen.

Or input station's PIN number

Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button.

Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Start to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.

You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s settings.

Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device.

8.7 WDS Screen

Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ZyXEL Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.

Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the ZyXEL

Device and any wireless clients.

At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with some ZyXEL Devices only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other ZyXEL Device’s documentation.

154

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS. The following screen displays.

Figure 102 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 40 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS

LABEL

Enable WDS

Security

DESCRIPTION

Select this option and the type of the key used to encrypt data between

APs. All the wireless APs (including the ZyXEL Device) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission.

#

TKIP

AES

Active

Remote Bridge

MAC Address

PSK

Apply

Cancel

If you de-select this option, the data sent between APs is not encrypted.

Anyone can read it.

Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption.

Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption.

This is the index number of the individual WDS link.

Select this to activate the link between the ZyXEL Device and the peer device to which this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down.

Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format

(six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).

Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols).

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

155

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.8 Scheduling Screen

Click Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling to open the Wireless LAN

Scheduling screen. Use this screen to configure when the ZyXEL Device enables or disables the wireless LAN.

Figure 103 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling

156

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 41 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling

LABEL

Enable

Wireless LAN

Scheduling

WLAN status

Day

The following times

DESCRIPTION

Select this to activate wireless LAN scheduling on your ZyXEL Device.

Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN.

Select the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off.

Specify the time period during which to apply the schedule.

Apply

Reset

For example, if you decide to turn off the wireless LAN everyday, but you set an exception from 12:00 to 1:30. Then the wireless LAN is only available from 12:00 to 1:30 everyday.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9 Wireless LAN Technical Reference

This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix.

8.9.1 Additional Wireless Terms

The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator.

Table 42 Additional Wireless Terms

TERM DESCRIPTION

RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.

Preamble

Authentication

Fragmentation

Threshold

By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the

ZyXEL Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission.

If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device.

A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short.

If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device.

The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network.

A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.

8.9.2 Wireless Security Overview

The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network.

8.9.2.1 SSID

Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

157

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.

8.9.2.2 MAC Address Filter

Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.

1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters 2 ; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.

You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.

This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the

MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.

8.9.2.3 User Authentication

Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.

For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.

Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network.

158

1.

Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.

These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.

2.

Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9.2.4 Encryption

Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message.

The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.

(See

Section 8.9.2.3 on page 158

for information about this.)

Table 43 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication

NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER

Weakest No Security

Static WEP

WPA-PSK

Stronges t

WPA2-PSK

WPA

WPA2

For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.

Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up

Static WEP in the wireless network.

Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly.

When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or

WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA

compatible option in the ZyXEL Device.

Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

159

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9.3 MBSSID

Traditionally, you needed to use different APs to configure different Basic Service

Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there was also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL Device’s MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set

IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs.

Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.

8.9.3.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs

• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.

• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s communications (but not communicate with each other).

• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.

8.9.4 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)

The ZyXEL Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS

(Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.

At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access point’s documentation for details.

The following example illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which does. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.

Figure 104 WDS Link Example

WDS

A

Internet

AP 1 AP 2

160

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9.5 WiFi Protected Setup

Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.

WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).

Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification

Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves.

8.9.5.1 Push Button Configuration

WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each

WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.

Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS

PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.

Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.

1

Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.

2

Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see

Section 8.6 on page 153

).

3

Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the ZyXEL

Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds.

4

Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.

If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list,

WPS was successful.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

161

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9.5.2 PIN Configuration

Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface).

Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method.

When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.

Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.

1

Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.

2

Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s

Guide for how to do this.

3

Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the

WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide

for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.5 on page 152 ).

4

Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.

Note: If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s

PIN in the client - it does not matter which.

5

Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.

Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.

6

On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful.

If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.

162

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.

Figure 105 Example WPS Process: PIN Method

ENROLLEE

WPS

This device’s

WPS PIN: 123456

REGISTRAR

WPS

Enter WPS PIN from other device:

START

WPS

START

WPS

WITHIN 2 MINUTES

SECURE EAP TUNNEL

SSID

WPA(2)-PSK

COMMUNICATION

8.9.5.3 How WPS Works

When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role.

One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible

Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-

PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

163

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.

Figure 106 How WPS works

ACTIVATE

WPS

WITHIN 2 MINUTES

ACTIVATE

WPS

164

WPS HANDSHAKE

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR

SECURE TUNNEL

SECURITY INFO

COMMUNICATION

The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.

The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.

Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.

By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

8.9.5.4 Example WPS Network Setup

This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.

The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.

Figure 107 WPS: Example Network Step 1

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR

SECURITY INFO

CLIENT 1 AP1

In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2.

Figure 108 WPS: Example Network Step 2

REGISTRAR

EXISTING CONNECTION

CLIENT 1 AP1

ENROLLEE

SE

CU

RIT

Y I

NF

O

CLIENT 2

In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

165

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.

Figure 109 WPS: Example Network Step 3

EXISTING CONNECTION

CLIENT 1

EX

IST

ING

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

AP1

REGISTRAR

CLIENT 2

ENROLLEE

SEC

URIT

Y IN

FO

AP2

8.9.5.5 Limitations of WPS

WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.

• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).

• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.

For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.

• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS.

WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-

PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).

166

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.

You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients

(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown

MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

167

Chapter 8 Wireless LAN

168

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 9

Network Address Translation

(NAT)

9.1 Overview

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.

9.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens

• Use the NAT General Setup screen (

Section 9.2 on page 170 ) to configure the

NAT setup settings.

• Use the Port Forwarding screen ( Section 9.3 on page 172 ) to configure

forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.

• Use the Address Mapping screen (

Section 9.4 on page 176 ) to change your

ZyXEL Device’s address mapping settings.

• Use the SIP ALG screen ( Section 9.4.2 on page 178 ) to enable and disable the

SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device.

9.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT

Inside/Outside and Global/Local

Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.

Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.

169

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

NAT

In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,

NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.

Port Forwarding

A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though

NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world.

SUA (Single User Account) Versus NAT

SUA (Single User Account) is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping, Many-to-One and Server. The ZyXEL Device also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private

LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in

Table 51 on page 183 .

• Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your ZyXEL

Device.

• Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your

ZyXEL Device.

Finding Out More

See Section 9.5 on page 179 for advanced technical information on NAT.

9.2 NAT General Setup

Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA/NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the ZyXEL Device.

170

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Click Network > NAT to open the following screen.

Figure 110 Network > NAT > General

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 44 Network > NAT > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Active

Network

Address

Translation

(NAT)

Select this check box to enable NAT.

SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your

ZyXEL Device.

Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your ZyXEL Device.

Max NAT/

Firewall

Session Per

User

When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the

Internet.

Apply

Cancel

Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the ZyXEL Device.

If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

171

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

9.3 Port Forwarding

Note: This screen is available only when you select SUA only in the NAT > General screen.

Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.

You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports.

The most often used port numbers and services are shown in

Appendix E on page

531 . Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.

Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.

Default Server IP Address

In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen.

Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.

Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP

172

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.

Figure 111 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example

A=192.168.1.33

LAN WAN

B=192.168.1.34

192.168.1.1

C=192.168.1.35

D=192.168.1.36

Internet

IP Address assigned by ISP

9.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen

Click Network > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.

See Appendix E on page 531 for port numbers commonly used for particular

services.

Figure 112 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

173

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 45 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding

LABEL

Default Server

Setup

DESCRIPTION

Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the ZyXEL Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup.

Port Forwarding

Service Name

Server IP

Address

Select a service from the drop-down list box.

Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service.

Add

#

Active

Click this button to add a rule to the table below.

This is the rule index number (read-only).

This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.

Service Name

Start Port

End Port

Server IP

Address

Modify

Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.

This is a service’s name.

This is the first port number that identifies a service.

This is the last port number that identifies a service.

This is the server’s IP address.

Apply

Cancel

Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule.

Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration.

174

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

9.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Edit

Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule. Select User define in the

Service Name field of the Port Forwarding screen or click an existing rule’s edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen shown next.

Figure 113 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding > Edit

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 46 Network > NAT > Port Forwarding > Edit

LABEL

Active

DESCRIPTION

Click this check box to enable the rule.

Service Name Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule.

Start Port Enter a port number in this field.

End Port

To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field.

To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field.

Enter a port number in this field.

To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field.

To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above.

Enter the inside IP address of the server here.

Server IP

Address

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

175

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

9.4 Address Mapping

Note: The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in the NAT > General screen.

Ordering your rules is important because the ZyXEL Device applies the rules in the order that you specify. When a rule matches the current packet, the ZyXEL Device takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored. If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule, your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules. For example, if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9.

In the set summary screen, the new rule will be rule 7, not 9. Now if you delete rule 4, rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule, so old rules 5, 6 and 7 become new rules 4, 5 and 6.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s address mapping settings, click Network > NAT

> Address Mapping to open the following screen.

Figure 114 Network > NAT > Address Mapping

176

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 47 Network > NAT > Address Mapping

LABEL

#

DESCRIPTION

This is the rule index number.

Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA). Local IP addresses are

N/A for Server port mapping.

Local End IP This is the end Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address. This field is N/A for

One-to-one and Server mapping types.

Global Start

IP

This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for

Many-to-One and Server mapping types.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Table 47 Network > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is N/A for

One-to-one, Many-to-One and Server mapping types.

Type 1-1: One-to-one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.

Modify

M-1: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global

IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation),

ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.

M-M Ov (Overload): Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local

IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

MM No (No Overload): Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local

IP address to unique global IP addresses.

Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.

Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.

9.4.1 Address Mapping Rule Edit

To edit an address mapping rule, click the rule’s edit icon in the Address

Mapping screen to display the screen shown next.

Figure 115 Network > NAT > Address Mapping > Edit

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

177

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 48 Network > NAT > Address Mapping > Edit

LABEL

Type

DESCRIPTION

Choose the port mapping type from one of the following.

One-to-One: One-to-One mode maps one local IP address to one global

IP address. Note that port numbers do not change for One-to-one NAT mapping type.

Many-to-One: Many-to-One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL's Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only.

Many-to-Many Overload: Many-to-Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

Many-to-Many No Overload: Many-to-Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses.

Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address (ILA). Local IP addresses are N/A for

Server port mapping.

Local End IP This is the end local IP address (ILA). If your rule is for all local IP addresses, then enter 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and

255.255.255.255 as the Local End IP address.

Global Start

IP

Server

Mapping Set

This field is N/A for One-to-One and Server mapping types.

This is the starting global IP address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP.

Global End IP This is the ending global IP address (IGA). This field is N/A for One-to-

One, Many-to-One and Server mapping types.

Only available when Type is set to Server.

Select a number from the drop-down menu to choose a port forwarding set.

Edit Details

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a port forwarding set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

9.4.2 SIP ALG

A SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG) allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the

ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the

ZyXEL Device’s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG.

178

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network > NAT > ALG.

Figure 116 Network > NAT > ALG

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 49 Network > NAT > ALG

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable SIP ALG Select this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with portforwarding and address-mapping rules.

Apply

Reset

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to return to previously saved configuration.

9.5 NAT Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

9.5.1 NAT Definitions

Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.

Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.

Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the

IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

179

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information.

Table 50 NAT Definitions

ITEM

Inside

Outside

Local

Global

DESCRIPTION

This refers to the host on the LAN.

This refers to the host on the WAN.

This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.

This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.

NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.

9.5.2 What NAT Does

In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,

NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the

IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.

The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-

Many Overload mapping – see Table 51 on page 183 ), NAT offers the additional

benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network.

For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network

Address Translator (NAT).

9.5.3 How NAT Works

Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for

Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses

180

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT) and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.

Figure 117 How NAT Works

LAN

192.168.1.13

192.168.1.12

SA

192.168.1.10

NAT Table

Inside Local

IP Address

192.168.1.10

192.168.1.11

192.168.1.12

192.168.1.13

Inside Global

IP Address

IGA 1

IGA 2

IGA 3

IGA 4

SA

IGA1

WAN

Internet

Inside Local

Address (ILA)

Inside Global

Address (IGA)

192.168.1.11

192.168.1.10

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

181

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

9.5.4 NAT Application

The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs

(logical LANs using IP alias) behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.

Figure 118 NAT Application With IP Alias

Corporation B

LAN2: 192.168.1.X

Network Server

“Admin=192.168.1.1

Corporation A

Server in

Admin Network

=IP1 (IGA 1)

NAT Server

192.168.1.1

LAN2: 192.168.2.X

Network Server

“Sales”=192.168.2.1

Internet

Server in

Sales Network

=IP2 (IGA 2)

NAT Server

192.168.2.1

LAN3: 192.168.3.X

Network Server

“R&D”=192.168.3.1

Server in

R&D Network

=IP3 (IGA 3)

NAT Server

192.168.3.1

WAN Addresses: LAN Addresses: (Default IPs)

IGA 1 ---------------> 192.168.1.1

IGA 2 ---------------> 192.168.2.1

IGA 3 ---------------> 192.168.3.1

9.5.5 NAT Mapping Types

NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

One to One: In One-to-One mode, the ZyXEL Device maps one local IP address to one global IP address.

Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the ZyXEL Device maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXEL’s Single User Account feature that previous

ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in today’s routers).

182

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the ZyXEL Device maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.

Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the ZyXEL

Device maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address.

Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world.

Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload

NAT mapping types.

The following table summarizes these types.

Table 51 NAT Mapping Types

TYPE

One-to-One

Many-to-One (SUA/PAT)

IP MAPPING

ILA1ÅÆ IGA1

ILA1ÅÆ IGA1

Many-to-Many Overload

Many-to-Many No Overload

Server

ILA2ÅÆ IGA1

ILA1ÅÆ IGA1

ILA2ÅÆ IGA2

ILA3ÅÆ IGA1

ILA4ÅÆ IGA2

ILA1ÅÆ IGA1

ILA2ÅÆ IGA2

ILA3ÅÆ IGA3

Server 1 IPÅÆ IGA1

Server 2 IPÅÆ IGA1

Server 3 IPÅÆ IGA1

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

183

Chapter 9 Network Address Translation (NAT)

184

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 0

Voice

10.1 Overview

Use this chapter to:

• Connect an analog phone to the ZyXEL Device.

• Make phone calls over the Internet, as well as the regular phone network.

• Configure settings such as speed dial and distinctive ringing.

• Configure network settings to optimize the voice quality of your phone calls.

10.1.1 What You Can Do in the VoIP Screens

These screens allow you to configure your ZyXEL Device to make phone calls over the Internet and your regular phone line, and to set up the phones you connect to the ZyXEL Device.

• Use the SIP Settings screen (

Section 10.2 on page 187

) to set up information about your SIP account.

• Use the SIP QoS screen (

Section 10.4 on page 193 ) to configure Quality of

Service for VoIP calls. QoS can give VoIP traffic higher priority on the network so it gets dealt with more quickly.

• Use the Analog Phone screen ( Section 10.5 on page 194

) to control which SIP accounts the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device use.

• Use the Advanced Analog Phone Setup screen (

Section 10.6 on page 194 ) to

configure audio settings such as volume levels for the phones connected to the

ZyXEL Device.

• Use the EXT. Table screen (

Section 10.7 on page 197 ) to configure extension

numbers for the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device so they can be separately identified for intercom use.

• Use the Common Phone Settings screen ( Section 10.8 on page 198

) to turn immediate dialing on or off.

• Use the Region screen (

Section 10.9 on page 199 ) to change settings that

depend on the country you are in.

• Use the Speed Dial screen (

Section 10.10 on page 200 ) to set up shortcuts for

dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

185

Chapter 10 Voice

• Use the Incoming Call Policy screen (

Section 10.11 on page 203 ) to configure

how the ZyXEL Device deals with incoming calls.

• Use the SIP Prefix screen (

Section 10.12 on page 205 ) to set up numbers you

dial on your phone that specify which SIP account you want to use.

You don’t necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your account. In fact, if your service provider did not supply information on a particular field in a screen, it is usually best to leave it at its default setting.

10.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP

VoIP

VoIP stands for Voice over IP. IP is the Internet Protocol, which is the messagecarrying standard the Internet runs on. So, Voice over IP is the sending of voice signals (speech) over the Internet (or another network that uses the Internet

Protocol).

SIP

SIP stands for Session Initiation Protocol. SIP is a signalling standard that lets one network device (like a computer or the ZyXEL Device) send messages to another.

In VoIP, these messages are about phone calls over the network. For example, when you dial a number on your ZyXEL Device, it sends a SIP message over the network asking the other device (the number you dialed) to take part in the call.

SIP Accounts

A SIP account is a type of VoIP account. It is an arrangement with a service provider that lets you make phone calls over the Internet. When you set the

ZyXEL Device to use your SIP account to make calls, the ZyXEL Device is able to send all the information about the phone call to your service provider on the

Internet.

Strictly speaking, you don’t need a SIP account. It is possible for one SIP device

(like the ZyXEL Device) to call another without involving a SIP service provider.

However, the networking difficulties involved in doing this make it tremendously impractical under normal circumstances. Your SIP account provider removes these difficulties by taking care of the call routing and setup - figuring out how to get your call to the right place in a way that you and the other person can talk to one another.

How to Find Out More

See Chapter 4 on page 57

for a tutorial showing how to set up these screens in an example scenario.

186

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

See Section 10.13 on page 206

for advanced technical information on SIP.

10.1.3 Before You Begin

• Before you can use these screens, you need to have a VoIP account already set up. If you don’t have one yet, you can sign up with a VoIP service provider over the Internet.

• You should have the information your VoIP service provider gave you ready, before you start to configure the ZyXEL Device.

10.2 The SIP Settings Screen

The ZyXEL Device uses a SIP account to make outgoing VoIP calls and check if an incoming call’s destination number matches your SIP account’s SIP number. In order to make or receive a VoIP call, you need to enable and configure a SIP account, and map it to a phone port. The SIP account contains information that allows your ZyXEL Device to connect to your VoIP service provider.

If you want to make only peer-to-peer VoIP calls, there is no VoIP service provider involved, so the SIP account information does not have to match a real VoIP service provider’s SIP account. You can make up the SIP numbers. However, you should still activate a SIP account and configure its number and map it to a phone port, so that the person you call knows what SIP number you are using and the

ZyXEL Device knows to which phone port it should forward an incoming VoIP call.

You must use speed dial to make peer-to-peer VoIP calls.

See

Section 10.5 on page 194

for how to map a SIP account to a phone port.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

187

Chapter 10 Voice

Use this screen to maintain basic information about each SIP account. You can also enable and disable each SIP account. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP

> SIP Settings.

Figure 119 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings

188

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 52 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings

LABEL

SIP Account

DESCRIPTION

Select the SIP account you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes.

SIP Settings

Active SIP

Account

Number

SIP Local Port

Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to use this account. Clear it if you do not want the ZyXEL Device to use this account.

Enter your SIP number. In the full SIP URI, this is the part before the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters.

Enter the ZyXEL Device’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value.

SIP Server

Address

Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters. It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy, redirect or register server.

SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 52 VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings

LABEL

REGISTER

Server Address

DESCRIPTION

Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server, if your

VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.

REGISTER

Server Port

SIP Service

Domain

Enter the SIP register server’s listening port number, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, enter the same port number you entered in the SIP Server Port field.

Enter the SIP service domain name. In the full SIP URI, this is the part after the @ symbol. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters.

Send Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls. Clear this if you do not want to send identification.

Authentication

User Name

Password

Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters.

Enter the user name for registering this SIP account, exactly as it was given to you. You can use up to 95 printable ASCII Extended set characters.

Apply

Cancel

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

Advanced Setup Click this to edit the advanced settings for this SIP account. The

Advanced SIP Setup screen appears.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

189

Chapter 10 Voice

10.3 The Advanced SIP Setup Screen

Click VoIP > SIP > SIP Settings to open the SIP Settings screen. Select a SIP account and click Advanced Setup to open the Advanced SIP Setup screen.

Use this screen to maintain advanced settings for each SIP account.

Figure 120 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced

190

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 53 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced

LABEL

SIP Account

SIP Server

Settings

URL Type

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the SIP account you see in this screen.

Select whether or not to include the SIP service domain name when the

ZyXEL Device sends the SIP number.

SIP - include the SIP service domain name.

Expiration

Duration

End Port

TEL - do not include the SIP service domain name.

Enter the number of seconds your SIP account is registered with the

SIP register server before it is deleted. The ZyXEL Device automatically tries to re-register your SIP account when one-half of this time has passed. (The SIP register server might have a different expiration.)

Register Resend timer

Session Expires Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session.

Min-SE

Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device waits before it tries again to register the SIP account, if the first try failed or if there is no response.

Enter the minimum number of seconds the ZyXEL Device lets a SIP session remain idle (without traffic) before it automatically disconnects the session. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on an expiration time for idle sessions. This field is the shortest expiration time that the ZyXEL Device accepts.

RTP Port Range

Start Port Enter the listening port number(s) for RTP traffic, if your VoIP service provider gave you this information. Otherwise, keep the default values.

To enter one port number, enter the port number in the Start Port and

End Port fields.

Voice

Compression

To enter a range of ports,

• enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the Start

Port field.

• enter the port number at the end of the range in the End Port field.

Select the type of voice coder/decoder (codec) that you want the ZyXEL

Device to use. G.711 provides higher voice quality but requires more bandwidth (64 kbps).

G.711A is typically used in Europe.

G.711u is typically used in North America and Japan.

G.726 operates at 16, 24, 32 or 40 kbps.

By contrast, G.729 only requires 8 kbps.

The ZyXEL Device must use the same codec as the peer. When two SIP devices start a SIP session, they must agree on a codec.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

191

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 53 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced

LABEL

Primary

Compression

Type

Secondary

Compression

Type

Third

Compression

Type

DTMF Mode

DESCRIPTION

Select the ZyXEL Device’s first choice for voice coder/decoder.

Select the ZyXEL Device’s second choice for voice coder/decoder. Select

None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first choice.

Select the ZyXEL Device’s third choice for voice coder/decoder. Select

None if you only want the ZyXEL Device to accept the first or second choice.

Control how the ZyXEL Device handles the tones that your telephone makes when you push its buttons. You should use the same mode your

VoIP service provider uses.

RFC 2833 - send the DTMF tones in RTP packets.

PCM - send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream. This method works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression

(like G.711). Codecs that use compression (like G.729 and G.726) can distort the tones.

SIP INFO - send the DTMF tones in SIP messages.

Outbound Proxy

Enable Select this if your VoIP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls. This allows the ZyXEL Device to work with any type of NAT router and eliminates the need for STUN or a SIP ALG. Turn off any SIP ALG on a NAT router in front of the ZyXEL Device to keep it from re-translating the IP address (since this is already handled by the outbound proxy server).

Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP outbound proxy server.

Server Port Enter the SIP outbound proxy server’s listening port, if your VoIP service provider gave you one. Otherwise, keep the default value.

MWI (Message

Waiting

Indication)

Enable Select this if you want to hear a waiting (beeping) dial tone on your phone when you have at least one voice message. Your VoIP service provider must support this feature.

Expiration Time Keep the default value for this field, unless your VoIP service provider tells you to change it. Enter the number of seconds the SIP server should provide the message waiting service each time the ZyXEL Device subscribes to the service. Before this time passes, the ZyXEL Device automatically subscribes again.

Call Forward

Call Forward

Table

Back

Select which call forwarding table you want the ZyXEL Device to use for incoming calls. You set up these tables in VoIP > Phone Book >

Incoming Call Policy.

Click this to return to the SIP Settings screen without saving your changes.

192

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 53 VoIP > SIP Settings > Advanced

LABEL

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

10.4 The SIP QoS Screen

Use this screen to maintain ToS and VLAN settings for the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click VoIP > SIP > QoS.

Figure 121 VoIP > SIP > QoS

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 54 VoIP > SIP > QoS

LABEL

SIP TOS Priority

Setting

RTP TOS

Priority Setting

Voice VLAN ID

DESCRIPTION

Enter the priority for SIP voice transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates

Type of Service priority tags with this priority to voice traffic that it transmits.

Enter the priority for RTP voice transmissions. The ZyXEL Device creates

Type of Service priority tags with this priority to RTP traffic that it transmits.

Select this if the ZyXEL Device has to be a member of a VLAN to communicate with the SIP server. Ask your network administrator, if you are not sure. Enter the VLAN ID provided by your network administrator in the field on the right. Your LAN and gateway must be configured to use VLAN tags.

Apply

Cancel

Otherwise, clear this field.

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

193

Chapter 10 Voice

10.5 The Analog Phone Screen

Use this screen to control which SIP accounts and PSTN line each phone uses. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone.

Figure 122 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 55 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone

LABEL

Phone Port

Settings

SIP Account

DESCRIPTION

This is the phone port in the ZyXEL Device.

Incoming Call apply to

Select the SIP account you want to use when making outgoing calls with the analog phone connected to this phone port.

Select a SIP account if you want to receive phone calls for the selected

SIP account on this phone port.

If you select more than one SIP account for incoming calls, there is no way to distinguish between them when you receive phone calls. If you do not select a source for incoming calls, you cannot receive any calls on this phone port.

Apply

Cancel

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

Advanced Setup Click this to edit the advanced settings for this phone port. The

Advanced Analog Phone Setup screen appears.

10.6 The Advanced Analog Phone Setup Screen

Use this screen to configure the volume, echo cancellation and VAD (Voice Activity

Detection) settings for each individual phone port on the ZyXEL Device. You can also select which SIP account to use for making outgoing calls.

194

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression

Voice Activity Detection (VAD) detects whether or not speech is present. This lets the ZyXEL Device reduce the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting “silent packets” when you are not speaking.

Comfort Noise Generation

When using VAD, the ZyXEL Device generates comfort noise when the other party is not speaking. The comfort noise lets you know that the line is still connected as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection.

Echo Cancellation

G.168 is an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk.

10.6.1 Configuring the Advanced Analog Phone Screen

To access this screen, click Advanced Setup in VoIP > Phone > Analog

Phone.

Figure 123 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

195

Chapter 10 Voice

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 56 VoIP > Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced

LABEL

Analog Phone

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the analog phone port you see in this screen.

Echo

Cancellation

Active G.168 Select this if you want to eliminate the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk.

This field controls how the ZyXEL Device handles fax messages.

Fax Option

G.711 Fax

Passthrough

Select this if the ZyXEL Device should use G.711 to send fax messages.

The peer devices must also use G.711.

T.38 Fax Relay Select this if the ZyXEL Device should send fax messages as UDP or

TCP/IP packets through IP networks. This provides better quality, but it may have inter-operability problems. The peer devices must also use

T.38.

Dialing Interval

Selection

Dialing Interval

Selection

Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait after you stop dialing numbers before it makes the phone call. The value depends on how quickly you dial phone numbers.

If you select Active Immediate Dial in VoIP > Phone > Common, you can press the pound key (#) to tell the ZyXEL Device to make the phone call immediately, regardless of this setting.

Voice Active

Detector

VAD Support

Auto Dial Phone

Number

Back

Apply

Cancel

Select this if the ZyXEL Device should stop transmitting when you are not speaking. This reduces the bandwidth the ZyXEL Device uses.

Auto Dial

Active Auto Dial Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial the phone number you enter in the Auto Dial Phone Number field as soon as you take the phone off the hook.

If you select Active Auto Dial, enter the phone number you want the

ZyXEL Device to automatically dial in this field.

Click this to return to the Analog Phone screen without saving your changes.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

196

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

10.7 The Phone Settings Ext. Table Screen

Each phone connected to the ZyXEL Device has an extension number so that it can be separately identified for intercom use. The default settings of extension numbers are shown in the following table.

Table 57

Default Ext. Numbers

PHONE

Analog Phone 1

Analog Phone 2

DEFAULT EXT. NUMBER

11

12

An extension number is composed of a group number and a sub number. If group number is not enabled, the extension number is simply the sub number. You can assign a group number to several phones and use this number to call the group of phones. When you dial a group number, all of the phones with the same group number ring. The phone that picks up first gets the line, and the other phones stop ringing.

Click VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table to access this screen.

Figure 124 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 58 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table

LABEL

Enable Group

Number

Phone

#

DESCRIPTION

Select this if you want to enable group number for the DECT and analog phones connected to the ZyXEL Device.

Use these fields to assign extension numbers to the phones connected to the ZyXEL Device.

This is an index number of the phone to be assigned an extension number.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

197

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 58 VoIP > Phone > Ext. Table

LABEL

Group

Number

DESCRIPTION

Enter a group number for this phone. The maximum length of a group number is one digit. This is only available when the check box of

Enable Group Number is selected.

For example, you can assign Phone 1 and Phone 2 a group number “5” and leave the sub numbers at default (“11” and “12”). When you dial

“5”, both Phone 1 and Phone 2 ring. If Phone 1 picks up the line first, it gets the line and Phone 2 stops ringing.

Sub Number Enter a sub number for this phone. The maximum length of a sub number is two digits. When the check box of Enable Group Number is not selected, the extension number is simply the sub number.

Extension

Number

This read-only field displays the extension number which is a combination of “Group Number” and “Sub Number“. When you change group number or sub number, the extension number automatically refreshes. Use extension number to make calls between phones connected to the ZyXEL Device.

Apply

Cancel

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

10.8 The Common Phone Settings Screen

Use this screen to activate and deactivate immediate dialing. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Common.

Figure 125 VoIP > Phone > Common

198

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 59 VoIP > Phone > Common

LABEL

Immediate Dial

Active

Immediate Dial

DESCRIPTION

Select this if you want to use the pound key (#) to tell the ZyXEL Device to make the phone call immediately, instead of waiting the number of seconds you selected in the Dialing Interval Selection in VoIP >

Phone > Analog Phone > Advanced Setup.

Apply

Cancel

If you select this, dial the phone number, and then press the pound key.

The ZyXEL Device makes the call immediately, instead of waiting. You can still wait, if you want.

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

10.9 The Phone Region Screen

Use this screen to maintain settings that depend on which region of the world the

ZyXEL Device is in. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone > Region.

Figure 126 VoIP > Phone > Region

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

199

Chapter 10 Voice

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 60 VoIP > Phone > Region

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Region Settings Select the place in which the ZyXEL Device is located.

Call Service

Mode

Select the mode for supplementary phone services (call hold, call waiting, call transfer and three-way conference calls) that your VoIP service provider supports.

Apply

Cancel

Europe Type - use supplementary phone services in European mode

USA Type - use supplementary phone services American mode

You might have to subscribe to these services to use them. Contact your

VoIP service provider.

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

10.10 The Speed Dial Screen

Use this screen to add, edit, or remove speed-dial numbers for outgoing calls.

Speed dial provides shortcuts for dialing frequently-used (VoIP) phone numbers.

You also have to create speed-dial entries if you want to make peer-to-peer calls or call SIP numbers that contain letters. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a shortcut (the speed dial number, #01 for example) on your phone's keypad to call the phone number.

In peer-to-peer calls, you call another VoIP device directly without going through a

VoIP service provider’s SIP server. Select Non-Proxy (Use IP or URL) in the

Type column and enter the callee’s IP address or domain name. The ZyXEL Device

200

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice sends SIP INVITE requests to the peer VoIP device when you use the speed dial entry.

Figure 127 Phone Book > Speed Dial

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 61 Phone Book > Speed Dial

LABEL

Speed Dial

#

Number

Name

Type

DESCRIPTION

Use this section to create or edit speed-dial entries.

Select the speed-dial number you want to use for this phone number.

Enter the SIP number you want the ZyXEL Device to call when you dial the speed-dial number.

Enter a name to identify the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number. You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters.

Select Use Proxy if you want to use one of your SIP accounts to call this phone number.

Add

Speed Dial

Phone Book

Select Non-Proxy (Use IP or URL) if you want to use a different SIP server or if you want to make a peer-to-peer call. In this case, enter the

IP address or domain name of the SIP server or the other party in the field below.

Click this to use the information in the Speed Dial section to update the Speed Dial Phone Book section.

Use this section to look at all the speed-dial entries and to erase them.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

201

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 61 Phone Book > Speed Dial

LABEL

#

Number

Name

Destination

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the speed-dial number you should dial to use this entry.

This field displays the SIP number the ZyXEL Device calls when you dial the speed-dial number.

This field displays the name of the party you call when you dial the speed-dial number.

This field is blank, if the speed-dial entry uses one of your SIP accounts.

Otherwise, this field shows the IP address or domain name of the SIP server or other party. (This field corresponds with the Type field in the

Speed Dial section.)

Use this field to edit or erase the speed-dial entry.

Clear

Cancel

Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this speed-dial entry into the Speed Dial section, where you can change it.

Click the Remove icon to erase this speed-dial entry.

Click this to erase all the speed-dial entries.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

202

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

10.11 Incoming Call Policy Screen

Use this screen to maintain rules for handling incoming calls. You can block, redirect, or accept them. To access this screen, click VoIP > Phone Book >

Incoming Call Policy.

Figure 128 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy

You can create two sets of call-forwarding rules. Each one is stored in a callforwarding table. Each field is described in the following table.

Table 62 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy

LABEL

Table Number

Forward to

Number Setup

Unconditional

Forward to

Number

DESCRIPTION

Select the call-forwarding table you want to see in this screen. If you change this field, the screen automatically refreshes.

The ZyXEL Device checks these rules, in the order in which they appear, after it checks the rules in the Advanced Setup section.

Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward all incoming calls to the specified phone number, regardless of other rules in the Forward

to Number Setup section. Specify the phone number in the field on the right.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

203

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 62 Phone Book > Incoming Call Policy

LABEL

Busy Forward to

Number

No Answer

Forward to

Number

No Answer

Waiting Time

DESCRIPTION

Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the phone port is busy. Specify the phone number in the field on the right. If you have call waiting, the incoming call is forwarded to the specified phone number if you reject or ignore the second incoming call.

Select this if you want the ZyXEL Device to forward incoming calls to the specified phone number if the call is unanswered. (See No Answer

Waiting Time.) Specify the phone number in the field on the right.

This field is used by the No Answer Forward to Number feature and

No Answer conditions below.

Advanced Setup The ZyXEL Device checks these rules after it checks the rules in the

Forward to Number Setup section.

# This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific rule. The sequence is important, however. The ZyXEL Device checks each rule in order, and it only follows the first one that applies.

Activate

Incoming Call

Number

Forward to

Number

Condition

Enter the number of seconds the ZyXEL Device should wait for you to answer an incoming call before it considers the call is unanswered.

Select this to enable this rule. Clear this to disable this rule.

Enter the phone number to which this rule applies.

Enter the phone number to which you want to forward incoming calls from the Incoming Call Number. You may leave this field blank, depending on the Condition.

Select the situations in which you want to forward incoming calls from the Incoming Call Number, or select an alternative action.

Apply

Cancel

Unconditional - The ZyXEL Device immediately forwards any calls from the Incoming Call Number to the Forward to Number.

Busy - The ZyXEL Device forwards any calls from the Incoming Call

Number to the Forward to Number when your SIP account already has a call connected.

No Answer - The ZyXEL Device forwards any calls from the Incoming

Call Number to the Forward to Number when the call is unanswered.

(See No Answer Waiting Time.)

Block - The ZyXEL Device rejects calls from the Incoming Call

Number.

Accept - The ZyXEL Device allows calls from the Incoming Call

Number. You might create a rule with this condition if you do not want incoming calls from someone to be forwarded by rules in the Forward

to Number section.

Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

204

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

10.12 SIP Prefix Screen

The SIP prefix screen allows you to set up numbers you dial on your phone to specify which SIP account you want to use for a call. If you dial only the phone number (no prefix number) the ZyXEL Device uses default SIP settings to make the call.

Click VoIP > Phone Book > SIP Prefix. The following screen displays.

Figure 129 Phone Book > SIP Prefix

Each field is described in the following table.

Table 63 Phone Book > SIP Prefix

LABEL

SIP Selection by

Prefix

#

Prefix

SIP Index

SIP Domain

Add

DESCRIPTION

Select the index number of the rule you want to edit.

Enter the prefix number (1 ~ 8 digits). This is the number you dial before you dial the phone number.

Select the SIP account you want to use to make outgoing calls when you dial the number in the Prefix field.

This field displays the SIP service domain name you entered when configuring this SIP account.

Click this to use the information in the SIP Selection by Prefix section to update the SIP Prefix Phone Book section.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

205

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 63 Phone Book > SIP Prefix

LABEL

SIP Prefix

Phone Book

#

Prefix

SIP Index

SIP Domain

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This section displays all SIP prefix numbers currently configured on the

ZyXEL Device.

This is a read-only index number.

This field displays the SIP prefix number you dial (before you dial the phone number) in order to use the SIP account specified in the SIP

Index field.

This field displays the SIP account used to make outgoing calls when you dial the number in the Prefix field.

This field displays the SIP domain of the corresponding SIP account.

Use this field to edit or erase the SIP prefix entry.

Clear

Cancel

Click the Edit icon to copy the information for this SIP prefix entry into the SIP Prefix section, where you can change it.

Click the Remove icon to erase this SIP prefix entry.

Click this to erase all the SIP prefix entries.

Click this to set every field in this screen to its last-saved value.

10.13 SIP Technical Reference

This section contains background material relevant to the VoIP > SIP screens.

10.13.1 VoIP

VoIP is the sending of voice signals over Internet Protocol. This allows you to make phone calls and send faxes over the Internet at a fraction of the cost of using the traditional circuit-switched telephone network. You can also use servers to run telephone service applications like PBX services and voice mail. Internet

Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) companies provide VoIP service.

Circuit-switched telephone networks require 64 kilobits per second (Kbps) in each direction to handle a telephone call. VoIP can use advanced voice coding techniques with compression to reduce the required bandwidth.

10.13.2 SIP

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet.

SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the

206

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuitswitched telephone networks.

SIP Identities

A SIP account uses an identity (sometimes referred to as a SIP address). A complete SIP identity is called a SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier). A SIP account's URI identifies the SIP account in a way similar to the way an e-mail address identifies an e-mail account. The format of a SIP identity is SIP-

Number@SIP-Service-Domain.

SIP Number

The SIP number is the part of the SIP URI that comes before the “@” symbol. A

SIP number can use letters like in an e-mail address ([email protected] for example) or numbers like a telephone number ([email protected] for example).

SIP Service Domain

The SIP service domain of the VoIP service provider is the domain name in a SIP

URI. For example, if the SIP address is [email protected]

, then

“VoIP-provider.com” is the SIP service domain.

SIP Registration

Each ZyXEL Device is an individual SIP User Agent (UA). To provide voice service, it has a public IP address for SIP and RTP protocols to communicate with other servers.

A SIP user agent has to register with the SIP registrar and must provide information about the users it represents, as well as its current IP address (for the routing of incoming SIP requests). After successful registration, the SIP server knows that the users (identified by their dedicated SIP URIs) are represented by the UA, and knows the IP address to which the SIP requests and responses should be sent.

Registration is initiated by the User Agent Client (UAC) running in the VoIP gateway (the ZyXEL Device). The gateway must be configured with information letting it know where to send the REGISTER message, as well as the relevant user and authorization data.

A SIP registration has a limited lifespan. The User Agent Client must renew its registration within this lifespan. If it does not do so, the registration data will be deleted from the SIP registrar's database and the connection broken.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

207

Chapter 10 Voice

The ZyXEL Device attempts to register all enabled subscriber ports when it is switched on. When you enable a subscriber port that was previously disabled, the

ZyXEL Device attempts to register the port immediately.

Authorization Requirements

SIP registrations (and subsequent SIP requests) require a username and password for authorization. These credentials are validated via a challenge / response system using the HTTP digest mechanism (as detailed in RFC3261, "SIP:

Session Initiation Protocol").

SIP Servers

SIP is a client-server protocol. A SIP client is an application program or device that sends SIP requests. A SIP server responds to the SIP requests.

When you use SIP to make a VoIP call, it originates at a client and terminates at a server. A SIP client could be a computer or a SIP phone. One device can act as both a SIP client and a SIP server.

SIP User Agent

A SIP user agent can make and receive VoIP telephone calls. This means that SIP can be used for peer-to-peer communications even though it is a client-server protocol. In the following figure, either A or B can act as a SIP user agent client to initiate a call. A and B can also both act as a SIP user agent to receive the call.

Figure 130 SIP User Agent

208

SIP Proxy Server

A SIP proxy server receives requests from clients and forwards them to another server.

In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C.

1

The client device (A in the figure) sends a call invitation to the SIP proxy server

(B).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

2

The SIP proxy server forwards the call invitation to C.

Figure 131 SIP Proxy Server

Chapter 10 Voice

SIP Redirect Server

A SIP redirect server accepts SIP requests, translates the destination address to an IP address and sends the translated IP address back to the device that sent the request. Then the client device that originally sent the request can send requests to the IP address that it received back from the redirect server. Redirect servers do not initiate SIP requests.

In the following example, you want to use client device A to call someone who is using client device C.

1

Client device A sends a call invitation for C to the SIP redirect server (B).

2

The SIP redirect server sends the invitation back to A with C’s IP address (or domain name).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

209

Chapter 10 Voice

3

Client device A then sends the call invitation to client device C.

Figure 132 SIP Redirect Server

210

SIP Register Server

A SIP register server maintains a database of SIP identity-to-IP address (or domain name) mapping. The register server checks your user name and password when you register.

RTP

When you make a VoIP call using SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP.

Pulse Code Modulation

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into bits.

SIP Call Progression

The following figure displays the basic steps in the setup and tear down of a SIP call. A calls B.

Table 64 SIP Call Progression

A

1. INVITE

B

2. Ringing

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 64 SIP Call Progression (continued)

A B

3. OK

4. ACK

5.Dialogue (voice traffic)

6. BYE

7. OK

1

A sends a SIP INVITE request to B. This message is an invitation for B to participate in a SIP telephone call.

2

B sends a response indicating that the telephone is ringing.

3

B sends an OK response after the call is answered.

4

A then sends an ACK message to acknowledge that B has answered the call.

5

Now A and B exchange voice media (talk).

6

After talking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request.

7

B replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request and the call is terminated.

SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers

Usually, the SIP UAC sets up a phone call by sending a request to the SIP proxy server. Then, the proxy server looks up the destination to which the call should be forwarded (according to the URI requested by the SIP UAC). The request may be forwarded to more than one proxy server before arriving at its destination.

The response to the request goes to all the proxy servers through which the request passed, in reverse sequence. Once the session is set up, session traffic is sent between the UAs directly, bypassing all the proxy servers in between.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

211

Chapter 10 Voice

The following figure shows the SIP and session traffic flow between the user agents (UA 1 and UA 2) and the proxy servers (this example shows two proxy servers, PROXY 1 and PROXY 2).

Figure 133 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers

PROXY 1

SIP

PROXY 2

212

SIP SIP

SIP

&

RTP

UA 1

The following table shows the SIP call progression.

Table 65 SIP Call Progression

UA 1

Invite

PROXY 1

Invite

100 Trying

PROXY 2

Invite

100 Trying

UA 2

UA 2

180

Ringing

180

Ringing

180

Ringing

200 OK

200 OK

200 OK

ACK

RTP

200 OK

RTP

BYE

1

User Agent 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 1. This message is an invitation to User Agent 2 to participate in a SIP telephone call. Proxy 1 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

2

Proxy 1 sends a SIP INVITE request to Proxy 2. Proxy 2 sends a response indicating that it is trying to complete the request.

3

Proxy 2 sends a SIP INVITE request to User Agent 2.

4

User Agent 2 sends a response back to Proxy 2 indicating that the phone is ringing. The response is relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1.

5

User Agent 2 sends an OK response to Proxy 2 after the call is answered. This is also relayed back to User Agent 1 via Proxy 1.

6

User Agent 1 and User Agent 2 exchange RTP packets containing voice data directly, without involving the proxies.

7

When User Agent 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE request.

8

User Agent 1 replies with an OK response confirming receipt of the BYE request, and the call is terminated.

Voice Coding

A codec (coder/decoder) codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into analog voice signals. The ZyXEL Device supports the following codecs.

• G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) waveform codec. PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals and converts them into digital samples. G.711 provides very good sound quality but requires 64 kbps of bandwidth.

• G.726 is an Adaptive Differential PCM (ADPCM) waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion. ADPCM converts analog audio into digital signals based on the difference between each audio sample and a prediction based on previous samples. The more similar the audio sample is to the prediction, the less space needed to describe it. G.726 operates at 16, 24,

32 or 40 kbps.

• G.729 is an Analysis-by-Synthesis (AbS) hybrid waveform codec that uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds.

G.729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8 kbps.

PSTN Call Setup Signaling

Dual-Tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) signaling uses pairs of frequencies (one lower frequency and one higher frequency) to set up calls. It is also known as Touch

Tone®. Each of the keys on a DTMF telephone corresponds to a different pair of frequencies.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

213

Chapter 10 Voice

Pulse dialing sends a series of clicks to the local phone office in order to dial numbers.

3

MWI (Message Waiting Indication)

Enable Message Waiting Indication (MWI) enables your phone to give you a message–waiting (beeping) dial tone when you have a voice message(s). Your

VoIP service provider must have a messaging system that sends message waiting status SIP packets as defined in RFC 3842.

Custom Tones (IVR)

IVR (Interactive Voice Response) is a feature that allows you to use your telephone to interact with the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device allows you to record custom tones for the Caller Ringing Tone and On Hold Tone functions.

The same recordings apply to both the caller ringing and on hold tones.

Table 66 Custom Tones Details

LABEL

Total Time for All Tones

DESCRIPTION

128 seconds for all custom tones combined

Time per Individual Tone 20 seconds

Total Number of Tones

Recordable

8

You can record up to 8 different custom tones but the total time must be 128 seconds or less.

Recording Custom Tones

Use the following steps if you would like to create new tones or change your tones:

1

Pick up the phone and press “****” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu.

2

Press a number from 1101~1108 on your phone followed by the “#” key.

3

Play your desired music or voice recording into the receiver’s mouthpiece. Press the “#” key.

4

You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.

Listening to Custom Tones

Do the following to listen to a custom tone:

3.

The ZyXEL Device does not support pulse dialing at the time of writing.

214

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

1

Pick up the phone and press “****” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu.

2

Press a number from 1201~1208 followed by the “#” key to listen to the tone.

3

You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.

Deleting Custom Tones

Do the following to delete a custom tone:

1

Pick up the phone and press “****” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu.

2

Press a number from 1301~1308 followed by the “#” key to delete the tone of your choice. Press 14 followed by the “#” key if you wish to clear all your custom tones.

You can continue to add, listen to, or delete tones, or you can hang up the receiver when you are done.

10.13.3 Quality of Service (QoS)

Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to provide bandwidth for realtime multimedia applications.

Type of Service (ToS)

Network traffic can be classified by setting the ToS (Type of Service) values at the data source (for example, at the ZyXEL Device) so a server can decide the best method of delivery, that is the least cost, fastest route and so on.

DiffServ

DiffServ is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ

Code Points (DSCP) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.

4

4.

The ZyXEL Device does not support DiffServ at the time of writing.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

215

Chapter 10 Voice

DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior

DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of

Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.

DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the

DSCP mapping.

Figure 134 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field

DSCP

(6-bit)

Unused

(2-bit)

The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding.

Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.

VLAN Tagging

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Only stations within the same group can communicate with each other.

Your ZyXEL Device can add IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID tags to voice frames that it sends to the network. This allows the ZyXEL Device to communicate with a SIP server that is a member of the same VLAN group. Some ISPs use the VLAN tag to identify voice traffic and give it priority over other traffic.

10.13.4 Phone Services Overview

Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The ZyXEL Device supports the following services:

• Call Hold

• Call Waiting

• Making a Second Call

• Call Transfer

• Call Forwarding (see

Section 10.11 on page 203 )

216

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

• Three-Way Conference

• Internal Calls

• Call Park and Pickup

• Do not Disturb

Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider.

The Flash Key

Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash" key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device.

You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key.

Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe

Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.

After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcommand, the current operation will be aborted.

Table 67 European Flash Key Commands

COMMAND

SUB-

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call.

Flash

Flash

Flash

0

1

2

Switch back to the call (if there is no second call).

Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer.

Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold.

1. Switch back and forth between two calls.

2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.

3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

217

Chapter 10 Voice

Table 67 European Flash Key Commands

COMMAND

Flash

Flash

SUB-

COMMAND

3

*98#

DESCRIPTION

Create three-way conference connection.

Transfer the call to another phone.

European Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.

If you have another call, press the flash key and then “2” to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold.

Press the flash key and then “0” to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line.

Press the flash key and then “1” to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold.

If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.

European Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number.

If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone.

Take one of the following actions.

• Reject the second call.

Press the flash key and then press “0”.

• Disconnect the first call and answer the second call.

Either press the flash key and press “1”, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings.

• Put the first call on hold and answer the second call.

Press the flash key and then “2”.

European Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.

1

Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.

2

When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom.

218

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 10 Voice

3

After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.

European Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.

1

When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone.

2

Dial a phone number directly to make another call.

3

When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press “3” to create a three-way conversation.

4

Hang up the phone to drop the connection.

5

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press

“2”.

USA Type Supplementary Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA

Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.

After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcommand, the current operation will be aborted.

Table 68 USA Flash Key Commands

COMMAND

SUB-

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call.

Flash *98#

Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.

Transfer the call to another phone.

USA Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.

If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold.

If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

219

Chapter 10 Voice

USA Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number.

If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone.

Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call.

USA Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.

1

Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.

2

When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom.

3

After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.

USA Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.

1

When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone.

2

Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B).

3

When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation.

4

Hang up the phone to drop the connection.

5

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key.

6

If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again.

7

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold.

220

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 11

Phone Usage

11.1 Overview

This chapter describes how to use a phone connected to your ZyXEL Device for basic tasks.

Note: Not all service providers support all features.

11.2 Dialing a Telephone Number

The PHONE LED turns green when your SIP account is registered. Dial a SIP number like “12345” on your phone’s keypad.

Use speed dial entries (see Section 10.10 on page 200 ) for peer-to-peer calls or

SIP numbers that use letters. Dial the speed dial entry on your telephone’s keypad.

Use your VoIP service provider’s dialing plan to call regular telephone numbers.

11.3 Using Speed Dial to Dial a Telephone

Number

After configuring the speed dial entry and adding it to the phonebook, press the speed dial entry’s key combination on your phone’s keypad.

11.4 Using Call Park and Pickup

Do the following to put a call on hold on one phone and continue it on another

(connected to the ZyXEL Device). This feature may not be supported by all service providers.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

221

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

1

During the call, press “*97#” and then any number (up to 8 digits long). You need to remember this number in order to pick up the call on another phone. Hang up the receiver.

2

Pick up another phone’s receiver. Press “#97#” followed by the same number you entered before to continue the call.

11.5 Checking the ZyXEL Device’s IP Address

Do the following to listen to the ZyXEL Device’s current IP address.

1

Pick up your phone’s receiver.

2

Press “****” on your phone’s keypad and wait for the message that says you are in the configuration menu.

3

Press “5” followed by the # key.

4

Listen to the IP address and make a note of it.

5

Hang up the receiver.

11.6 Auto Provisioning and Auto Firmware

Upgrade

If your service provider uses an auto-provisioning server to set up your device, you must first enter the HTTP pincode (supplied by your service provider). This authenticates your ZyXEL Device with the auto provisioning server, allowing you to use the service.

• On a phone connected to the device, enter “*99**”, your SIP number, “*”, the

HTTP pincode you were given, then “#”.

• For example, if your SIP number is 0123456 and the HTTP pincode you were given is 9876, you would enter “*99**0123456*9876#”.

During auto-provisioning, the ZyXEL Device checks to see if there is a newer firmware version (if your service provider activates this feature). If newer firmware is available, the ZyXEL Device plays a recording when you pick up your phone’s handset.

• Press “*99#” to upgrade the ZyXEL Device’s firmware.

• Press “#99#” to not upgrade the ZyXEL Device’s firmware.

222

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

11.7 Phone Services Overview

Supplementary services such as call hold, call waiting, and call transfer. are generally available from your VoIP service provider. The ZyXEL Device supports the following services:

• Call Hold

• Call Waiting

• Making a Second Call

• Call Transfer

• Call Forwarding (see

Section 10.11 on page 203 )

• Three-Way Conference

• Internal Calls

• Call Park and Pickup

• Do not Disturb

Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone port, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider.

11.7.1 The Flash Key

Flashing means to press the hook for a short period of time (a few hundred milliseconds) before releasing it. On newer telephones, there should be a "flash" key (button) that generates the signal electronically. If the flash key is not available, you can tap (press and immediately release) the hook by hand to achieve the same effect. However, using the flash key is preferred since the timing is much more precise. With manual tapping, if the duration is too long, it may be interpreted as hanging up by the ZyXEL Device.

You can invoke all the supplementary services by using the flash key.

11.7.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the Europe

Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

223

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcommand, the current operation will be aborted.

Table 69 European Flash Key Commands

COMMAND

SUB-

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call.

Flash

Flash

Flash

Flash

Flash

0

1

2

3

*98#

Switch back to the call (if there is no second call).

Drop the call presently on hold or reject an incoming call which is waiting for answer.

Disconnect the current phone connection and answer the incoming call or resume with caller presently on hold.

1. Switch back and forth between two calls.

2. Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.

3. Separate the current three-way conference call into two individual calls (one is on-line, the other is on hold).

Create three-way conference connection.

Transfer the call to another phone.

11.7.2.1 European Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.

If you have another call, press the flash key and then “2” to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold.

Press the flash key and then “0” to disconnect the call presently on hold and keep the current call on line.

Press the flash key and then “1” to disconnect the current call and resume the call on hold.

If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.

11.7.2.2 European Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number.

If there is a second call to a telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone.

Take one of the following actions.

• Reject the second call.

Press the flash key and then press “0”.

224

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

• Disconnect the first call and answer the second call.

Either press the flash key and press “1”, or just hang up the phone and then answer the phone after it rings.

• Put the first call on hold and answer the second call.

Press the flash key and then “2”.

11.7.2.3 European Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.

1

Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.

2

When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom.

3

After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.

11.7.2.4 European Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.

1

When you are on the phone talking to someone, press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone.

2

Dial a phone number directly to make another call.

3

When the second call is answered, press the flash key and press “3” to create a three-way conversation.

4

Hang up the phone to drop the connection.

5

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (one is on-line, the other is on hold), press the flash key and press

“2”.

11.7.3 USA Type Supplementary Services

This section describes how to use supplementary phone services with the USA

Type Call Service Mode. Commands for supplementary services are listed in the table below.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

225

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

After pressing the flash key, if you do not issue the sub-command before the default sub-command timeout (2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcommand, the current operation will be aborted.

Table 70 USA Flash Key Commands

COMMAND

SUB-

COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

Flash Put a current call on hold to place a second call. After the second call is successful, press the flash key again to have a three-way conference call.

Flash *98#

Put a current call on hold to answer an incoming call.

Transfer the call to another phone.

11.7.3.1 USA Call Hold

Call hold allows you to put a call (A) on hold by pressing the flash key.

If you have another call, press the flash key to switch back and forth between caller A and B by putting either one on hold.

If you hang up the phone but a caller is still on hold, there will be a remind ring.

11.7.3.2 USA Call Waiting

This allows you to place a call on hold while you answer another incoming call on the same telephone (directory) number.

If there is a second call to your telephone number, you will hear a call waiting tone.

Press the flash key to put the first call on hold and answer the second call.

11.7.3.3 USA Call Transfer

Do the following to transfer an incoming call (that you have answered) to another phone.

1

Press the flash key to put the caller on hold.

2

When you hear the dial tone, dial “*98#” followed by the number to which you want to transfer the call. to operate the Intercom.

3

After you hear the ring signal or the second party answers it, hang up the phone.

11.7.3.4 USA Three-Way Conference

Use the following steps to make three-way conference calls.

226

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

1

When you are on the phone talking to someone (party A), press the flash key to put the caller on hold and get a dial tone.

2

Dial a phone number directly to make another call (to party B).

3

When party B answers the second call, press the flash key to create a three-way conversation.

4

Hang up the phone to drop the connection.

5

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections (with party A on-line and party B on hold), press the flash key.

6

If you want to go back to the three-way conversation, press the flash key again.

7

If you want to separate the activated three-way conference into two individual connections again, press the flash key. This time the party B is on-line and party A is on hold.

11.8 Phone Functions Summary

The following table shows the key combinations you can enter on your phone’s keypad to use certain features.

Table 71 Phone Functions Summary

ACTION FUNCTION

*99** HTTP pincode

*99#

#99#

*98#

*97#

#97#

*66#

*95#

#95#

*41#

#41#

DESCRIPTION

Use this if your service provider gave you a personal identification number to enter in order to start using the service. See

Section 11.6 on page 222 .

Enable firmware update Use these to upload or not upload new firmware to

Disable firmware update the ZyXEL Device, if requested by your service provider. See

Section 11.6 on page 222 .

Call transfer Transfer a call to another phone. See

Section 11.7.2 on page 223 (Europe type) and

Section 11.7.3 on page 225 (USA type).

Call park

Call pickup

Call return

Use these to place a call on hold on one phone and then continue it on another (if supported by your

service provider). See Chapter 28 on page 445

.

Place a call to the last person who called you. See

Chapter 28 on page 445 .

Enable Do Not Disturb

Disable Do Not Disturb

Enable call waiting

Disable call waiting

Use these to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you, or to turn this function off.

Chapter 28 on page 445

Use these to allow you to put a call on hold while answering another, or to turn this function off. See

Section 11.7.2 on page 223 (Europe type) and

Section 11.7.3 on page 225 (USA type).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

227

Chapter 11 Phone Usage

Table 71 Phone Functions Summary

ACTION FUNCTION

*21# Enable call forward

#21# Disable call forward

*22*

*23*

*24*

*70

*85

Uncondition forward

No answer forward

Busy forward

One shot Call Waiting

Disable

One shot Call Waiting

Enable

DESCRIPTION

Use these to allow you to use the call forwarding tables you set in the ZyXEL Device, or to turn this function off. See

Section 10.11 on page 203 .

Forward all incoming calls. See Section 10.11 on page 203 .

Forward incoming calls if you do not answer. See

Section 10.11 on page 203 .

Forward calls if you are already making a call. See

Section 10.11 on page 203 .

Activate or deactivate call waiting on the next call only. See

Section 11.7.2 on page 223 (Europe type)

and

Section 11.7.3 on page 225 (USA type)

228

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 2

Firewall

12.1 Overview

Use the ZyXEL Device firewall screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:

• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.

• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.

The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM

(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked

(3 and 4).

Figure 135 Default Firewall Action

LAN

A

1

2

WAN

3

4

12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens

• Use the General screen (

Section 12.2 on page 234

) to enable firewall and/or triangle route on the ZyXEL Device, and set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules.

• Use the Rules screen (

Section 12.3 on page 236 ) to view the configured firewall

rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

229

Chapter 12 Firewall

• Use the Threshold screen (

Section 12.4 on page 241

) to set the thresholds that the ZyXEL Device uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions).

12.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall

DoS

Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The

ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks.

Anti-Probing

If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists. The ZyXEL Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed.

ICMP

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet

Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user.

DoS Thresholds

For DoS attacks, the ZyXEL Device uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements.

Finding Out More

• See

Section 12.1.3 on page 230 for an example of setting up a firewall.

• See

Section 12.5 on page 245 for advanced technical information on firewall.

12.1.3 Firewall Rule Setup Example

The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical “MyService” connection from the Internet.

230

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

1

Click Security > Firewall > Rules.

2

Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field.

Figure 136 Firewall Example: Rules

Chapter 12 Firewall

3

In the Rules screen, select the index number after that you want to add the rule.

For example, if you select “6”, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8.

4

Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen.

5

In the Edit Rule screen, click the Edit Customized Services link to open the

Customized Service screen.

6

Click an index number to display the Customized Services Config screen and configure the screen as follows and click Apply.

Figure 137 Edit Custom Port Example

7

Select Any in the Destination Address List box and then click Delete.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

231

Chapter 12 Firewall

8

Configure the destination address screen as follows and click Add.

Figure 138 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address

9

Use the Add >> and Remove buttons between Available Services and

Selected Services list boxes to configure it as follows. Click Apply when you are done.

232

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

Note: Custom services show up with an “*” before their names in the Services list box and the Rules list box.

Figure 139 Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Select Customized Services

On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule, the

Rules screen should look like the following.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

233

Chapter 12 Firewall

Rule 1 allows a “MyService” connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10.0.0.10 through 10.0.0.15 on the LAN.

Figure 140 Firewall Example: Rules: MyService

12.2 The Firewall General Screen

Use this screen to configure the firewall settings. Click Security > Firewall to display the following screen.

Figure 141 Security > Firewall > General

234

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 72 Security > Firewall > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Active Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall. The ZyXEL Device performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated.

Bypass Triangle

Route

If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the ZyXEL Device. This is called an asymmetrical or “triangle” route. This causes the ZyXEL Device to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection).

Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the ZyXEL

Device. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the ZyXEL

Device and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See

Section 12.5.4.1 on page 247

for an example.

This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to LAN / Router, LAN to

WAN, WAN to WAN / Router, WAN to LAN).

Packet

Direction

Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to LAN / Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to either another computer/subnet on the LAN interface of the ZyXEL Device or the ZyXEL

Device itself.

Default Action Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules.

Log

Expand...

Basic...

Apply

Cancel

Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender.

Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a

TCP packet) or an ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender.

Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets.

Select the check box to create a log (when the above action is taken) for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of your customized rules.

Click this to display more information.

Click this to display less information.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

235

Chapter 12 Firewall

12.3 The Firewall Rule Screen

Note: The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn.

Refer to Section 12.5 on page 245 for more information.

Click Security > Firewall > Rules to bring up the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed.

Figure 142 Security > Firewall > Rules

236

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 73 Security > Firewall > Rules

LABEL

Firewall Rules

Storage

Space in Use

Packet

Direction

Create a new rule after rule number

#

Active

DESCRIPTION

This read-only bar shows how much of the ZyXEL Device's memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red.

Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules.

Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number. For example, if you select “6”, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule

8.

The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure (summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen.

This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn.

This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

Table 73 Security > Firewall > Rules (continued)

LABEL

Source IP

DESCRIPTION

This drop-down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any.

Destination IP This drop-down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any.

Service This drop-down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule

applies. See Appendix E on page 531 for more information.

Action

Schedule

Log

Modify

This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destinationunreachable message to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit).

This field tells you whether a schedule is specified (Yes) or not (No).

This field shows you whether a log is created when packets match this rule (Yes) or not (No).

Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.

Order

Apply

Cancel

Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule.

Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action.

Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field. Type a number in the Move the rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

12.3.1 Configuring Firewall Rules

Refer to Section 12.1.2 on page 230 for more information.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

237

Chapter 12 Firewall

Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click Add or click a rule’s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels.

Figure 143 Security > Firewall > Rules > Edit

238

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 74 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit

LABEL

Edit Rule

DESCRIPTION

Active

Action for

Matched Packet

Source/Destination Address

Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address? Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet

Address and Any Address.

Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here.

End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here.

Subnet Mask

Add >>

Select this option to enable this firewall rule.

Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of

(Reject) or allow the passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule.

Edit <<

Delete

Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable.

Click Add >> to add a new address to the Source or Destination

Address box. You can add multiple addresses, ranges of addresses, and/or subnets.

To edit an existing source or destination address, select it from the box and click Edit <<.

Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or

Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it.

Services

Available/

Selected Services

Edit Customized

Service

Please see Appendix E on page 531 for more information on services

available. Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left, then click Add >> to add it to the Selected Services box on the right. To remove a service, highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right, then click Remove.

Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services.

Schedule

Day to Apply

Time of Day to

Apply (24-Hour

Format)

Log

Log Packet Detail

Information

Select everyday or the day(s) of the week to apply the rule.

Select All Day or enter the start and end times in the hour-minute format to apply the rule.

This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not. Go to the Log Settings page and select the Access Control logs category to have the ZyXEL Device record these logs.

Alert

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

239

Chapter 12 Firewall

Table 74 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit (continued)

LABEL

Send Alert

Message to

Administrator

When Matched

Back

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to have the ZyXEL Device generate an alert when the rule is matched.

Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

12.3.2 Customized Services

Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the ZyXEL

Device. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA

(Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See

Appendix E on page 531

for some examples. Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen.

Figure 144 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services

240

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 75 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services

LABEL

No.

Name

Protocol

Port

Back

DESCRIPTION

This is the number of your customized port. Click a rule’s number of a service to go to the Firewall Customized Services Config screen to configure or edit a customized service.

This is the name of your customized service.

This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized service.

This is the port number or range that defines your customized service.

Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

12.3.3 Configuring a Customized Service

Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen.

Figure 145 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 76 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Config

LABEL

Config

DESCRIPTION

Service

Name

Type a unique name for your custom port.

Service Type Choose the IP port (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box.

Port Configuration

Type Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service.

Port Number Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Delete

Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Click this to delete the current rule.

12.4 The Firewall Threshold Screen

For DoS attacks, the ZyXEL Device uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions).

These thresholds apply globally to all sessions.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

241

Chapter 12 Firewall

For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established statethe TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed. Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN (synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK (acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK

(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established.

Figure 146 Three-Way Handshake

For UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. An unusually high number (or arrival rate) of half-open sessions could indicate a DOS attack.

12.4.1 Threshold Values

If everything is working properly, you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the default threshold values should work for most small offices. Tune these parameters when you believe the ZyXEL Device has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the logs show that the

ZyXEL Device is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:

1

The maximum number of opened sessions.

2

The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network.

3

The CPU power of servers in your LAN network.

4

Network bandwidth.

5

Type of traffic for certain servers.

Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors (especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy).

242

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

• If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey, it’s recommended that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small period of time and the ZyXEL Device may classify them as DoS attacks.

12.4.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds

The ZyXEL Device also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded. The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all

TCP connections.

Click Firewall > Threshold to bring up the next screen.

Figure 147 Security > Firewall > Threshold

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 77 Security > Firewall > Threshold

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Denial of Service

Thresholds

The ZyXEL Device measures both the total number of existing halfopen sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts. Both

TCP and UDP half-open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements. Measurements are made once a minute.

One Minute Low This is the rate of new half-open sessions per minute that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half-open sessions as necessary, until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

243

Chapter 12 Firewall

Table 77 Security > Firewall > Threshold (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

One Minute High This is the rate of new half-open sessions per minute that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the ZyXEL Device deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts.

Maximum

Incomplete Low

Maximum

Incomplete High

TCP Maximum

Incomplete

Action taken when TCP

Maximum

Incomplete reached threshold

Apply

Cancel

For example, if you set the one minute high to 100, the ZyXEL Device starts deleting half-open sessions when more than 100 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute. It stops deleting half-open sessions when the number of session establishment attempts detected in a minute goes below the number set as the one minute low.

This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half-open sessions. The ZyXEL Device continues to delete half-open requests as necessary, until the number of existing half-open sessions drops below this number.

This is the number of existing half-open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the number of existing half-open sessions rises above this number, the ZyXEL Device deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests. Do not set Maximum Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete Low number.

For example, if you set the maximum incomplete high to 100, the

ZyXEL Device starts deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions rises above 100. It stops deleting half-open sessions when the number of existing half-open sessions drops below the number set as the maximum incomplete low.

An unusually high number of half-open sessions with the same destination host address could indicate that a DoS attack is being launched against the host.

Specify the number of existing half-open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half-open sessions to that same destination host IP address. Enter a number between 1 and 256. As a general rule, you should choose a smaller number for a smaller network, a slower system or limited bandwidth. The ZyXEL Device sends alerts whenever the TCP

Maximum Incomplete is exceeded.

Select the action that ZyXEL Device should take when the TCP maximum incomplete threshold is reached. You can have the ZyXEL

Device either:

Delete the oldest half open session when a new connection request comes.

or

Deny new connection requests for the number of minutes that you specify (between 1 and 255).

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

244

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

12.5 Firewall Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

12.5.1 Firewall Rules Overview

Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Device’s default settings. The ZyXEL Device checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the ZyXEL Device takes the action specified in the rule.

Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:

• LAN to LAN/ Router

• LAN to WAN

• WAN to LAN

• WAN to WAN/ Router

Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN.

By default, the ZyXEL Device’s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:

• LAN to LAN/ Router

These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the ZyXEL Device

(remote management) and communicate between networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface (IP alias).

Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the ZyXEL Device.

• LAN to WAN

These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN.

By default, the ZyXEL Device’s stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions:

• WAN to LAN

These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN.

Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

245

Chapter 12 Firewall

• WAN to WAN/ Router

By default the ZyXEL Device stops computers on the WAN from managing the

ZyXEL Device or using the ZyXEL Device as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN. You could configure one of these rules to allow a

WAN computer to manage the ZyXEL Device.

Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the ZyXEL Device.

You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so.

For example, you may create rules to:

• Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet.

• Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN.

• Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server.

• Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN.

These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator.

Your customized rules take precedence and override the ZyXEL Device’s default rules.

12.5.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall

1

Change the default password via web configurator.

2

Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way.

3

Limit who can access your router.

4

Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.

5

For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces.

6

Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.

7

Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.

246

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

12.5.3 Security Considerations

Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the ZyXEL Device and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them.

Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:

1

Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet?

For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?

2

Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?

3

Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the

Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers.

4

Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?

Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens.

12.5.4 Triangle Route

When the firewall is on, your ZyXEL Device acts as a secure gateway between your

LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the ZyXEL Device to protect your LAN against attacks.

Figure 148 Ideal Firewall Setup

LAN

1

WAN

2

Internet

12.5.4.1 The “Triangle Route” Problem

A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two

Ethernet devices. You may have more than one connection to the Internet

(through one or more ISPs). If an alternate gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address), the “triangle

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

247

Chapter 12 Firewall route” (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe the “triangle route” problem.

1

A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN.

2

The ZyXEL Device reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the

WAN.

3

The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the ZyXEL Device.

As a result, the ZyXEL Device resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged.

Figure 149 “Triangle Route” Problem

LAN WAN

1

ISP 1

Internet

2

3

ISP 2

A

12.5.4.2 Solving the “Triangle Route” Problem

If you have the ZyXEL Device allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the ZyXEL Device and its firewall protection.

Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your ZyXEL Device supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the ZyXEL Device being the gateway for each logical network.

It’s like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the ZyXEL Device to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario.

1

A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN.

248

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 12 Firewall

2

The ZyXEL Device reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2.

3

The reply from the WAN goes to the ZyXEL Device.

4

The ZyXEL Device then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1.

Figure 150 IP Alias

LAN Subnet 1

WAN

1

ISP 1

4

2

Internet

ISP 2

3

A

Subnet 2

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

249

Chapter 12 Firewall

250

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 3

Content Filtering

13.1 Overview

Internet content filtering allows you to block web sites based on keywords in the

URL.

13.1.1 What You Can Do in the Content Filter Screens

• Use the Keyword screen ( Section 13.2 on page 254

) to block web sites based on a keyword in the URL.

• Use the Schedule screen (

Section 13.3 on page 255 ) to specify the days and

times keyword blocking is active.

• Use the Trusted screen ( Section 13.4 on page 256 ) to exclude computers and

other devices on your LAN from the keyword blocking filter.

13.1.2 What You Need to Know About Content Filtering

URL

The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for example “http://www.zyxel.com”.

Finding Out More

See Section 13.1.4 on page 252 for an example of setting up content filtering.

13.1.3 Before You Begin

To use the Trusted screen, you need the IP addresses of devices on your

network. See the LAN section ( Section 13.4 on page 256 ) for more information.

251

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 13 Content Filtering

13.1.4 Content Filtering Example

The following shows the steps required for a parent (Bob) to set up content filtering on a home network in order to limit his children’s access to certain web sites. In the following example, all URLs containing the word ‘bad’ are blocked.

1

Click Security > Content Filter to display the following screen.

2

Select Active Keyword Blocking.

3

In the Keyword field type keywords to identify websites to be blocked.

4

Click Add Keyword for each keyword to be entered.

5

Click Apply.

Figure 151 Security > Content Filter > Keyword: Example

252

Bob’s son arrives home from school at four, while his parents arrive later, at about

7pm. So keyword blocking is enabled for these times on weekdays and not on the weekend when the parents are at home.

1

Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule to display the following screen.

2

Click Edit Daily to Block and select all weekdays.

3

Under Start Time and End Time, type the times for blocking to begin and end

(4pm ~ 7pm in this example).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 13 Content Filtering

4

Click Apply.

Figure 152 Security > Content Filter > Schedule: Example

The children can access the family computer in the living room, while only the parents use another computer in the study room. So keyword blocking is only needed on the family computer and the study computer can be excluded from keyword blocking. Bob’s home network is on the domain “192.168.1.xxx”. Bob gave his home computer a static IP address of 192.168.1.2 and the study computer a static IP address of 192.168.1.3. To exclude the study computer from keyword blocking he follows these steps.

1

Click Security > Content Filter > Trusted to display the following screen.

2

In the Start IP Address and End IP Address fields, type 192.168.1.3.

3

Click Apply.

Figure 153 Security > Content Filter > Trusted: Example

That finishes setting up keyword blocking on the home computer.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

253

Chapter 13 Content Filtering

13.2 The Keyword Screen

Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL. For example, if you enable the keyword "bad", the ZyXEL Device blocks all sites containing this keyword including the URL http://www.website.com/bad.html.

To have your ZyXEL Device block websites containing keywords in their URLs, click

Security > Content Filter. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 154 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword

254

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 78 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword

LABEL

Active Keyword

Blocking

Block Websites that contain these keywords in the URL:

Delete

Clear All

Keyword

Add Keyword

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to enable this feature.

This box contains the list of all the keywords that you have configured the ZyXEL Device to block.

Highlight a keyword in the box and click this to remove it.

Click this to remove all of the keywords from the list.

Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to

127 characters). Wildcards are not allowed.

Click this after you have typed a keyword.

Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed.

When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 13 Content Filtering

Table 78 Security > Content Filtering > Keyword (continued)

LABEL

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

13.3 The Schedule Screen

Use this screen to set the days and times for the ZyXEL Device to perform content filtering. Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 155 Security > Content Filter > Schedule

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 79 Security > Content Filter: Schedule

LABEL

Schedule

DESCRIPTION

Select Block Everyday to make the content filtering active everyday.

Active

Start TIme

End Time

Otherwise, select Edit Daily to Block and configure which days of the week (or everyday) and which time of the day you want the content filtering to be active.

Select the check box to have the content filtering to be active on the selected day.

Enter the time when you want the content filtering to take effect in hourminute format.

Enter the time when you want the content filtering to stop in hour-minute format.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

255

Chapter 13 Content Filtering

Table 79 Security > Content Filter: Schedule (continued)

LABEL

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

13.4 The Trusted Screen

Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your ZyXEL Device. Click Security > Content Filter > Trusted. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 156 Security > Content Filter: Trusted

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 80 Security > Content Filter: Trusted

LABEL

Start IP Address

End IP Address

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Type the IP address of a computer (or the beginning IP address of a specific range of computers) on the LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering.

Type the ending IP address of a specific range of users on your

LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering. Leave this field blank if you want to exclude an individual computer.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

256

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 4

VPN

14.1 Overview

A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP/IP for communication.

Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the

Internet. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer. The following figure is an example of an IPSec VPN tunnel.

Figure 157 VPN: Example

Internet

VPN Tunnel

X Y

14.1.1 What You Can Do in the VPN Screens

• Use the Setup screen ( Section 14.2 on page 260 ) to view the configured VPN

policies and add, edit or remove a VPN policy.

• Use the Monitor screen (

Section 14.7 on page 275 ) to display and manage the

current active VPN connections.

• Use the VPN Global Setting screen (

Section 14.8 on page 277 ) to allow

NetBIOS packets passing through the VPN connection.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

257

Chapter 14 VPN

14.1.2 What You Need to Know About IPSec VPN

A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association (SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the

ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router will use. The first phase establishes an

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network. The following figure illustrates this.

Figure 158 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA

A

B

IPSec SA

Internet

X

IKE SA

Y

In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication, and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first.

My IP Address

My IP Address is the WAN IP address of the ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel if My IP Address changes after setup.

The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

• The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address (static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.

Secure Gateway Address

Secure Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote

IPSec router (secure gateway).

258

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address, enter it in the Secure

Gateway Address field. You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateway’s domain name (if it has one) in the Secure Gateway Address field.

You can also enter a remote secure gateway’s domain name in the Secure

Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway’s WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway’s new WAN IP address).

Dynamic Secure Gateway Address

If the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and does not use

DDNS, enter 0.0.0.0 as the secure gateway’s address. In this case only the remote secure gateway can initiate SAs. This may be useful for telecommuters

initiating a VPN tunnel to the company network (see Section 14.9.12 on page 286

for configuration examples).

The Secure Gateway IP Address may be configured as 0.0.0.0 only when using

IKE key management and not Manual key management.

Finding Out More

See Section 14.9 on page 277 for advanced technical information on IPSec VPN.

14.1.3 Before You Begin

If a VPN tunnel uses Telnet, FTP, WWW, then you should configure remote management (Remote MGMT) to allow access for that service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

259

Chapter 14 VPN

14.2 VPN Setup Screen

The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator.

Figure 159 IPSec Summary Fields

Local Network

Remote Network

Remote

IPSec Router

Local IP Address

VPN Tunnel

My IP Address

Remote IP Address

Secure Gateway IP Address

Local and remote IP addresses must be static.

Click Security > VPN to open the VPN Setup screen. This is a menu of your

IPSec rules (tunnels). The IPSec summary menu is read-only. Edit a VPN by selecting an index number and then configuring its associated submenus.

Figure 160 Security > VPN > Setup

260

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 81 Security > VPN > Setup

LABEL

No.

DESCRIPTION

This is the VPN policy index number. Click a number to edit VPN policies.

Active This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not. A Yes signifies that this VPN policy is active. No signifies that this VPN policy is not active.

Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.

Local Address This is the IP address(es) of computer(s) on your local network behind your ZyXEL Device.

The same (static) IP address is displayed twice when the Local Address

Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to Single.

The beginning and ending (static) IP addresses, in a range of computers are displayed when the Local Address Type field in the VPN Setup -

Edit screen is configured to Range.

Remote

Address

Encap.

IPSec

Algorithm

Secure

Gateway IP

Modify

Apply

Cancel

A (static) IP address and a subnet mask are displayed when the Local

Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to

Subnet.

This is the IP address(es) of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.

This field displays N/A when the Secure Gateway Address field displays 0.0.0.0. In this case only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN.

The same (static) IP address is displayed twice when the Remote

Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to

Single.

The beginning and ending (static) IP addresses, in a range of computers are displayed when the Remote Address Type field in the VPN Setup -

Edit screen is configured to Range.

A (static) IP address and a subnet mask are displayed when the Remote

Address Type field in the VPN Setup - Edit screen is configured to

Subnet.

This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode (Tunnel is the default selection).

This field displays the security protocols used for an SA.

Both AH and ESP increase ZyXEL Device processing requirements and communications latency (delay).

This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router. This field displays 0.0.0.0 when you configure the Secure Gateway Address field in the VPN-IKE screen to 0.0.0.0.

Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the VPN configuration.

Click the Remove icon to remove an existing VPN configuration.

Click this to save your changes and apply them to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this return your settings to their last saved values.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

261

Chapter 14 VPN

14.3 The VPN Edit Screen

Click an Edit icon in the VPN Setup screen to edit VPN policies.

Figure 161 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

262

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

IPSec Setup

Active

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

Keep Alive

DESCRIPTION

Select either Yes or No from the drop-down list box.

NAT Traversal

Local

Select Yes to have the ZyXEL Device automatically reinitiate the SA after the SA lifetime times out, even if there is no traffic. The remote

IPSec router must also have keep alive enabled in order for this feature to work.

This function is available if the VPN Protocol is ESP.

Name

Encapsulation

Mode

DNS Server (for

IPSec VPN)

Select this check box if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are

NAT routers between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal, and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router.

Type up to 32 characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.

IPSec Key Mode Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. IKE provides more protection so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management.

Negotiation

Mode

Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode.

Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.

If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here. The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses.

A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names.

Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the ZyXEL Device that can use the VPN tunnel. The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.

Local Address

Type

Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select

Single for a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.

IP Address Start When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the

Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning

(static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your

ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to

Subnet, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL

Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

263

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

End / Subnet

Mask

Remote

DESCRIPTION

When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your

ZyXEL Device.

Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel. The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses.

Remote Address

Type

Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select

Single with a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.

IP Address Start When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address

Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

End / Subnet

Mask

When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to

Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote

Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Address

Information

Local ID Type Select IP to identify this ZyXEL Device by its IP address.

Select DNS to identify this ZyXEL Device by a domain name.

Select E-mail to identify this ZyXEL Device by an e-mail address.

264

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

Content

DESCRIPTION

When you select IP in the Local ID Type field, type the IP address of your computer in the local Content field. The ZyXEL Device automatically uses the IP address in the My IP Address field (refer to the My IP Address field description) if you configure the local

Content field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank.

My IP Address

Peer ID Type

Content

It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 in the local Content field or use the DNS or E-mail ID type in the following situations.

When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

When you want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

When you select DNS or E-mail in the Local ID Type field, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify this ZyXEL Device in the local Content field. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or email address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.

Enter the WAN IP address of your ZyXEL Device. The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes.

The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address

(static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.

Select IP to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address.

Select DNS to identify the remote IPSec router by a domain name.

Select E-mail to identify the remote IPSec router by an e-mail address.

The configuration of the peer content depends on the peer ID type.

For IP, type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection. If you configure this field to 0.0.0.0 or leave it blank, the ZyXEL Device will use the address in the Secure Gateway

Address field (refer to the Secure Gateway Address field description).

For DNS or E-mail, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify the remote IPSec router. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.

It is recommended that you type an IP address other than 0.0.0.0 or use the DNS or E-mail ID type in the following situations:

When there is a NAT router between the two IPSec routers.

When you want the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between VPN connection requests that come in from remote IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

265

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

Secure Gateway

Address

DESCRIPTION

Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection. Set this field to

0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address (the

IPSec Key Mode field must be set to IKE).

In order to have more than one active rule with the Secure Gateway

Address field set to 0.0.0.0, the ranges of the local IP addresses cannot overlap between rules.

If you configure an active rule with 0.0.0.0 in the Secure Gateway

Address field and the LAN’s full IP address range as the local IP address, then you cannot configure any other active rules with the

Secure Gateway Address field set to 0.0.0.0.

Security Protocol

VPN Protocol Select ESP if you want to use ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload).

The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication

Algorithm fields (described below).

Pre-Shared Key Click the button to use a pre-shared key for authentication, and type in your pre-shared key. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.

Certificate

My Certificates

Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x” (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in

"0x0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.

Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends.

Click the button to use a certificate for authentication. Select the certificate you want to use from the list. You can create, import and configure certificates in the Security > Certificates screens, or click the My Certificates link.

Click this to go to the Security > Certificates > My Certificates screen. If you do not click Apply first, your VPN settings will not be saved.

266

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 82 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit

LABEL

Encryption

Algorithm

DESCRIPTION

Select DES, 3DES, AES or NULL from the drop-down list box.

When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.

Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.

Authentication

Algorithm

Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select

NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.

Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message

Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.

Back

Apply

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

267

Chapter 14 VPN

14.4 Configuring Advanced IKE Settings

Click Advanced Setup in the VPN Setup-Edit screen to open this screen.

Figure 162 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup

268

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 83 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

VPN - IKE -

Advanced Setup

Protocol

Enable Replay

Detection

Enter 1 for ICMP, 6 for TCP, 17 for UDP, and so on. 0 is the default and signifies any protocol.

As a VPN setup is processing intensive, the system is vulnerable to

Denial of Service (DoS) attacks The IPSec receiver can detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against replay attacks. Select

YES from the drop-down menu to enable replay detection, or select

NO to disable it.

Local Start Port 0 is the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to

65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23,

Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.

End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If

Local Start Port is left at 0, End will also remain at 0.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 83 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup (continued)

LABEL

Remote Start

Port

DESCRIPTION

0 is the default and signifies any port. Type a port number from 0 to

65535. Some of the most common IP ports are: 21, FTP; 53, DNS; 23,

Telnet; 80, HTTP; 25, SMTP; 110, POP3.

End Enter a port number in this field to define a port range. This port number must be greater than that specified in the previous field. If

Remote Start Port is left at 0, End will also remain at 0.

Phase 1

Negotiation

Mode

Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode.

Pre-Shared Key Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called

"pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.

Encryption

Algorithm

Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x” (zero x), which is not counted as part of the 16 to 62-character range for the key. For example, in

"0x0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and “0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.

Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends.

Select DES, 3DES or AES from the drop-down list box.

Authentication

Algorithm

SA Life Time

(Seconds)

When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.

Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.

Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message

Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.

Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 60 to 3,000,000 seconds

(almost 35 days).

Key Group

A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.

You must choose a key group for phase 1 IKE setup. DH1 (default) refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

269

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 83 Security > VPN > Setup > Edit > Advanced Setup (continued)

LABEL

Phase 2

DESCRIPTION

Active Protocol Use the drop-down list box to choose from ESP or AH.

Encryption

Algorithm

This field is available when you select ESP in the Active Protocol field.

Select DES, 3DES, AES or NULL from the drop-down list box.

Authentication

Algorithm

SA Life Time

(Seconds)

Encapsulation

Perfect Forward

Secrecy (PFS)

Back

Apply

Cancel

When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.

Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.

Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select

NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.

Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message

Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.

Define the length of time before an IKE SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 60 to 3,000,000 seconds (almost 35 days).

A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.

Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box.

Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is disabled (NONE) by default in phase

2 IPSec SA setup. This allows faster IPSec setup, but is not so secure.

Choose DH1 or DH2 from the drop-down list box to enable PFS. DH1 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number (more secure, yet slower).

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device and return to the VPN-IKE screen.

Click Cancel to return to the VPN-IKE screen without saving your changes.

270

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

14.5 Manual Key Setup

Manual key management is useful if you have problems with IKE key management.

14.5.1 Security Parameter Index (SPI)

An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same IPSec protocol. This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway. The SPI (Security Parameter Index) along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security Association (SA). The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway. The local VPN gateway then uses the network, encryption and key values that the administrator associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel.

Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

271

Chapter 14 VPN

14.6 Configuring Manual Key

You only configure VPN manual key when you select Manual in the IPSec Key

Mode field on the VPN Setup-Edit screen. This is the VPN Setup - Manual Key screen as shown next.

Figure 163 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key

272

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 84 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key

LABEL

IPSec Setup

Active

Name

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to activate this VPN policy.

Type up to 32 characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 84 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

IPSec Key Mode Select IKE or Manual from the drop-down list box. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using IKE key management.

SPI Type a number (base 10) from 1 to 999999 for the Security Parameter

Index.

Select Tunnel mode or Transport mode from the drop-down list box. Encapsulation

Mode

DNS Server (for

IPSec VPN)

If there is a private DNS server that services the VPN, type its IP address here. The ZyXEL Device assigns this additional DNS server to the ZyXEL Device 's DHCP clients that have IP addresses in this IPSec rule's range of local addresses.

Local

A DNS server allows clients on the VPN to find other computers and servers on the VPN by their (private) domain names.

Local IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.

Local Address

Type

Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select

Single for a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.

IP Address Start When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the

Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning

(static) IP address, in a range of computers on your LAN behind your

ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to

Subnet, this is a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL

Device.

End / Subnet

Mask

When the Local Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device. When the Local Address Type field is configured to Subnet, this is a subnet mask on the LAN behind your

ZyXEL Device.

Remote Remote IP addresses must be static and correspond to the remote

IPSec router's configured local IP addresses.

Remote Address

Type

Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.

Use the drop-down menu to choose Single, Range, or Subnet. Select

Single with a single IP address. Select Range for a specific range of IP addresses. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

273

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 84 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

IP Address Start When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, enter a

(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Range, enter the beginning (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote Address

Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

End / Subnet

Mask

When the Remote Address Type field is configured to Single, this field is N/A. When the Remote Address Type field is configured to

Range, enter the end (static) IP address, in a range of computers on the network behind the remote IPSec router. When the Remote

Address Type field is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.

Address

Information

My IP Address Enter the WAN IP address of your ZyXEL Device. The VPN tunnel has to be rebuilt if this IP address changes.

The following applies if this field is configured as 0.0.0.0:

Secure Gateway

Address

Security Protocol

IPSec Protocol

The ZyXEL Device uses the current ZyXEL Device WAN IP address

(static or dynamic) to set up the VPN tunnel.

Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection.

Encryption

Algorithm

Encapsulation

Key (only with

ESP)

Authentication

Algorithm

Select ESP if you want to use ESP (Encapsulation Security Payload).

The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH. If you select ESP here, you must select options from the Encryption Algorithm and Authentication

Algorithm fields (described next).

Select DES, 3DES or NULL from the drop-down list box.

When DES is used for data communications, both sender and receiver must know the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.

Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.

With DES, type a unique key 8 characters long. With 3DES, type a unique key 24 characters long. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated.

Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message

Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA-1 for maximum security.

274

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 84 Security > VPN > Setup > Manual Key (continued)

LABEL

Authentication

Key

Back

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Type a unique authentication key to be used by IPSec if applicable.

Enter 16 characters for MD5 authentication or 20 characters for SHA-

1 authentication. Any characters may be used, including spaces, but trailing spaces are truncated.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

14.7 Viewing SA Monitor

Click Security > VPN > Monitor to open the screen as shown. Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections.

A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific

VPN tunnel. This screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to display active VPN connections. This screen is read-only. The following table describes the fields in this tab.

When there is outbound traffic but no inbound traffic, the SA times out automatically after two minutes. A tunnel with no outbound or inbound traffic is

"idle" and does not timeout until the SA lifetime period expires. See Section

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

275

Chapter 14 VPN

14.9.7 on page 283 on keep alive to have the ZyXEL Device renegotiate an IPSec

SA when the SA lifetime expires, even if there is no traffic.

Figure 164 Security > VPN > Monitor

276

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 85 Security > VPN > Monitor

LABEL

No

DESCRIPTION

This is the security association index number.

Name This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy.

Encapsulation This field displays Tunnel or Transport mode.

IPSec

Algorithm

Disconnect

This field displays the security protocol, encryption algorithm, and authentication algorithm used in each VPN tunnel.

Refresh

Select one of the security associations, and then click Disconnect to stop that security association.

Click Refresh to display the current active VPN connection(s).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

14.8 Configuring VPN Global Setting

To change your ZyXEL Device’s global settings, click VPN > VPN Global Setting.

The screen appears as shown.

Figure 165 Security > VPN > Global Setting

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 86 Security > VPN > Global Setting

LABEL

Windows

Networking

(NetBIOS over TCP/

IP)

Allow NetBIOS

Traffic Through All

IPSec Tunnels

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to find other computers. It may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through

VPN tunnels in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa.

Select this check box to send NetBIOS packets through the VPN connection.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

14.9 IPSec VPN Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

277

Chapter 14 VPN

14.9.1 IPSec Architecture

The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows.

Figure 166 IPSec Architecture

IPSec Algorithms

The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH

(Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure (including implementation algorithms).

The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES

(Data Encryption Standard) and Triple DES algorithms.

The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC

2404, provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols.

Key Management

Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN.

14.9.2 IPSec and NAT

Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the ZyXEL

Device.

NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode.

An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data

278

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted.

A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.

IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet

(including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet.

Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device.

Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT.

Table 87 VPN and NAT

SECURITY PROTOCOL

AH

AH

ESP

ESP

MODE

Transpor t

Tunnel

Transpor t

Tunnel

N

N

NAT

N

Y

14.9.3 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal

NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An

IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.

NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the ZyXEL

Device’s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

279

Chapter 14 VPN allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.

Figure 167 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers

Internet

A

B

Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header

unchanged. In Figure 167 on page 280

, when IPSec router A tries to establish an

IKE SA, IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and

B build the IKE SA.

For NAT traversal to work, you must:

• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode).

• Use IKE keying mode.

• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints.

• Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A.

Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table.

Table 88 VPN and NAT

SECURITY

PROTOCOL

AH

AH

ESP

ESP

MODE NAT

Transport N

Tunnel N

Transport Y*

Tunnel Y

Y* - This is supported in the ZyXEL Device if you enable NAT traversal.

280

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

14.9.4 Encapsulation

The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode.

Figure 168 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation

Transport Mode

Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol

(AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP).

With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data.

With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process.

Tunnel Mode

Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems.

Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption.

This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:

Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway.

Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

281

Chapter 14 VPN

14.9.5 IKE Phases

There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation – phase 1

(Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an

IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.

Figure 169 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA

282

In phase 1 you must:

• Choose a negotiation mode.

• Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key.

• Choose an encryption algorithm.

• Choose an authentication algorithm.

• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group (DH1 or DH2).

• Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.

In phase 2 you must:

• Choose which protocol to use (ESP or AH) for the IKE key exchange.

• Choose an encryption algorithm.

• Choose an authentication algorithm

• Choose whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) using Diffie-Hellman

public-key cryptography – see Appendix D on page 507

. Select None (the default) to disable PFS.

• Choose Tunnel mode or Transport mode.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec

SA should stay up before it times out. The ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. The ZyXEL Device also automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if both

IPSec routers have keep alive enabled, even if there is no traffic. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.

14.9.6 Negotiation Mode

The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security

Association (SA) will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations.

Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection

(your identity is not revealed in the negotiation).

Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1).

However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication.

14.9.7 Keep Alive

When you initiate an IPSec tunnel with keep alive enabled, the ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the tunnel when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires

(see

Section 14.9.5 on page 282 for more on the IPSec SA lifetime). In effect, the

IPSec tunnel becomes an “always on” connection after you initiate it. Both IPSec routers must have a ZyXEL Device-compatible keep alive feature enabled in order for this feature to work.

If the ZyXEL Device has its maximum number of simultaneous IPSec tunnels connected to it and they all have keep alive enabled, then no other tunnels can take a turn connecting to the ZyXEL Device because the ZyXEL Device never drops the tunnels that are already connected.

When there is outbound traffic with no inbound traffic, the ZyXEL Device automatically drops the tunnel after two minutes.

14.9.8 Remote DNS Server

In cases where you want to use domain names to access Intranet servers on a remote network that has a DNS server, you must identify that DNS server. You

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

283

Chapter 14 VPN cannot use DNS servers on the LAN or from the ISP since these DNS servers cannot resolve domain names to private IP addresses on the remote network

The following figure depicts an example where three VPN tunnels are created from

ZyXEL Device A; one to branch office 2, one to branch office 3 and another to headquarters. In order to access computers that use private domain names on the headquarters (HQ) network, the ZyXEL Device at branch office 1 uses the Intranet

DNS server in headquarters. The DNS server feature for VPN does not work with

Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

Figure 170 VPN Host using Intranet DNS Server Example

ISP DNS Servers

212.54.64.170

212.54.54.171

1

LAN

DNS:212.54.64.170

212.54.64.171

Remote

IPSec Router

HQ

10.1.1.1/200

Internet

A

VPN DNS: 10.1.1.10

Intranet DNS

10.1.1.10

= VPN Tunnel

2

192.168.1.1/50

3

172.16.1.1/50

If you do not specify an Intranet DNS server on the remote network, then the VPN host must use IP addresses to access the computers on the remote network.

14.9.9 ID Type and Content

With aggressive negotiation mode (see

Section 14.9.6 on page 283

), the ZyXEL

Device identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted. This enables the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. Telecommuters can use separate passwords to simultaneously connect to the ZyXEL Device from IPSec routers with dynamic IP

addresses (see Section 14.9.12 on page 286 for a telecommuter configuration

example).

Regardless of the ID type and content configuration, the ZyXEL Device does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses.

284

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

With main mode (see

Section 14.9.6 on page 283 ), the ID type and content are

encrypted to provide identity protection. In this case the ZyXEL Device can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote

IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device can distinguish up to 12 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms (DES, 3DES and AES), two authentication algorithms (MD5 and SHA1) and two key groups (DH1 and DH2) when you configure a VPN rule

(see

Section 14.4 on page 268

). The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for incoming SAs.

The type of ID can be a domain name, an IP address or an e-mail address. The content is the IP address, domain name, or e-mail address.

Table 89 Local ID Type and Content Fields

LOCAL ID

TYPE=

IP

CONTENT=

DNS

E-mail

Type the IP address of your computer or leave the field blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically use its own IP address.

Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this

ZyXEL Device.

Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this

ZyXEL Device.

The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address.

Table 90 Peer ID Type and Content Fields

PEER ID

TYPE=

IP

CONTENT=

DNS

E-mail

Type the IP address of the computer with which you will make the VPN connection or leave the field blank to have the ZyXEL Device automatically use the address in the Secure Gateway Address field.

Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router.

Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify the remote IPSec router.

The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address. The domain name also does not have to match the remote router’s IP address or what you configure in the

Secure Gateway Address field below.

14.9.9.1 ID Type and Content Examples

Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

285

Chapter 14 VPN

The two ZyXEL Devices in this example can complete negotiation and establish a

VPN tunnel.

Table 91 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example

ZYXEL DEVICE A

Local ID type: E-mail

Local ID content: [email protected]

Peer ID type: IP

Peer ID content: 1.1.1.2

ZYXEL DEVICE B

Local ID type: IP

Local ID content: 1.1.1.2

Peer ID type: E-mail

Peer ID content: [email protected]

The two ZyXEL Devices in this example cannot complete their negotiation because

ZyXEL Device B’s Local ID type is IP, but ZyXEL Device A’s Peer ID type is set to E-mail. An “ID mismatched” message displays in the IPSEC LOG.

Table 92 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example

ZYXEL DEVICE A

Local ID type: IP

Local ID content: 1.1.1.10

Peer ID type: E-mail

Peer ID content: [email protected]

ZYXEL DEVICE B

Local ID type: IP

Local ID content: 1.1.1.10

Peer ID type: IP

Peer ID content: N/A

14.9.10 Pre-Shared Key

A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see

Section 14.9.5 on page 282 for more on IKE phases). It is called

“pre-shared” because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.

14.9.11 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups

Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-

Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. 768-bit (Group 1 -

DH1) and 1024-bit (Group 2 – DH2) Diffie-Hellman groups are supported. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys.

14.9.12 Telecommuter VPN/IPSec Examples

The following examples show how multiple telecommuters can make VPN connections to a single ZyXEL Device at headquarters. The telecommuters use

IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters has a static public IP address.

286

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

14.9.12.1 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example

See the following figure and table for an example configuration that allows multiple telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) to use one VPN rule to simultaneously access a ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure). The telecommuters do not have domain names mapped to the WAN IP addresses of their IPSec routers. The telecommuters must all use the same IPSec parameters but the local IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) should not overlap.

Figure 171 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example

LAN

A

192.168.2.12

LAN

192.168.3.2

LAN

192.168.4.15

B

C

Internet

HQ

LAN

192.168.1.10

Table 93 Telecommuters Sharing One VPN Rule Example

FIELDS TELECOMMUTERS

My IP Address: 0.0.0.0 (dynamic IP address assigned by the ISP)

Secure Gateway

IP Address:

Public static IP address

HEADQUARTERS

Public static IP address

0.0.0.0 With this IP address only the telecommuter can initiate the IPSec tunnel.

192.168.1.10

Local IP Address: Telecommuter A: 192.168.2.12

Telecommuter B: 192.168.3.2

Telecommuter C: 192.168.4.15

Remote IP

Address:

192.168.1.10

0.0.0.0 (N/A)

14.9.12.2 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example

In this example the telecommuters (A, B and C in the figure) use IPSec routers with domain names that are mapped to their dynamic WAN IP addresses (use

Dynamic DNS to do this).

With aggressive negotiation mode (see Section 14.9.6 on page 283 ), the ZyXEL

Device can use the ID types and contents to distinguish between VPN rules.

Telecommuters can each use a separate VPN rule to simultaneously access a

ZyXEL Device at headquarters. They can use different IPSec parameters. The local

IP addresses (or ranges of addresses) of the rules configured on the ZyXEL Device

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

287

Chapter 14 VPN at headquarters can overlap. The local IP addresses of the rules configured on the telecommuters’ IPSec routers should not overlap.

See the following table and figure for an example where three telecommuters each use a different VPN rule for a VPN connection with a ZyXEL Device located at headquarters. The ZyXEL Device at headquarters (HQ in the figure) identifies each incoming SA by its ID type and content and uses the appropriate VPN rule to establish the VPN connection.

The ZyXEL Device at headquarters can also initiate VPN connections to the telecommuters since it can find the telecommuters by resolving their domain names.

Figure 172 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example

LAN

A

192.168.2.12

LAN

192.168.3.2

LAN

192.168.4.15

B

C

Internet

HQ

LAN

192.168.1.10

Table 94 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example

TELECOMMUTERS

All Telecommuter Rules:

My IP Address 0.0.0.0

Secure Gateway Address: bigcompanyhq.com

Remote IP Address: 192.168.1.10

Peer ID Type: E-mail

Peer ID Content: [email protected]

HEADQUARTERS

All Headquarters Rules:

My IP Address: bigcompanyhq.com

Local IP Address: 192.168.1.10

Local ID Type: E-mail

Local ID Content: [email protected]

Telecommuter A

(telecommutera.dydns.org)

Local ID Type: IP

Local ID Content: 192.168.2.12

Local IP Address: 192.168.2.12

Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 1:

Peer ID Type: IP

Peer ID Content: 192.168.2.12

Secure Gateway Address: telecommuter1.com

Remote Address 192.168.2.12

288

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 14 VPN

Table 94 Telecommuters Using Unique VPN Rules Example (continued)

TELECOMMUTERS

Telecommuter B

(telecommuterb.dydns.org)

Local ID Type: DNS

Local ID Content: telecommuterb.com

Local IP Address: 192.168.3.2

HEADQUARTERS

Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 2:

Peer ID Type: DNS

Peer ID Content: telecommuterb.com

Secure Gateway Address: telecommuterb.com

Remote Address 192.168.3.2

Telecommuter C

(telecommuterc.dydns.org)

Local ID Type: E-mail

Local ID Content: [email protected]

Local IP Address: 192.168.4.15

Headquarters ZyXEL Device Rule 3:

Peer ID Type: E-mail

Peer ID Content: [email protected]

Secure Gateway Address: telecommuterc.com

Remote Address 192.168.4.15

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

289

Chapter 14 VPN

290

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 5

Certificates

15.1 Overview

The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.

15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Certificate Screens

• Use the My Certificate screens (see

Section 15.2 on page 295 ) to generate and

export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the ZyXEL

Device’s CA-signed certificates.

• Use the Trusted CA screens (see Section 15.5 on page 304 ) to save the

certificates of trusted CAs to the ZyXEL Device. You can also export the certificates to a computer.

• Use the Trusted Remote Hosts screens (see Section 15.8 on page 311 ) to

import self-signed certificates from trusted remote hosts.

• Use the Directory Servers screen (see

Section 15.11 on page 316

) to configure a list of addresses of directory servers (that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates).

15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Certificates

Certification Authorities

A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like

CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. You can use the

ZyXEL Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority.

291

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Public and Private Keys

When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available; the other key is private and must be kept secure. Public-key encryption in general works as follows.

1

Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny. Tim generates a public-private key pair. What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other.

2

Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available.

3

Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny.

4

Jenny receives the message and uses Tim’s public key to decrypt it.

5

Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses

Jenny’s public key to decrypt the message.

The ZyXEL Device uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection. For example, a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm.

The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority’s public key to verify the certificates.

Certification Path

A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The ZyXEL Device does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked.

Certificate Directory Servers

Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL (Certificate Revocation List). The ZyXEL

Device can check a peer’s certificate against a directory server’s list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure).

Advantages of Certificates

Certificates offer the following benefits.

292

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

• The ZyXEL Device only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate.

• Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys.

Self-signed Certificates

You can have the ZyXEL Device act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates.

15.1.3 Verifying a Certificate

Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the ZyXEL

Device, you should verify that you have the actual certificate. This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the ZyXEL Device also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.

You can use a certificate’s fingerprint to verify it. A certificate’s fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithms. The following procedure describes how to check a certificate’s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate.

1

Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer.

2

Make sure that the certificate has a “.cer” or “.crt” file name extension.

Figure 173 Certificates on Your Computer

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

293

Chapter 15 Certificates

3

Double-click the certificate’s icon to open the Certificate window. Click the

Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields.

Figure 174 Certificate Details

4

Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may very based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection.

294

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

15.2 My Certificates

Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen. This is the ZyXEL Device’s summary list of certificates and certification requests. Certificates display in black and certification requests display in gray.

Figure 175 Security > Certificates > My Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 95 Security > Certificates > My Certificates

LABEL

PKI Storage

Space in Use

DESCRIPTION

This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.

Replace

#

Name

Type

This button displays when the ZyXEL Device has the factory default certificate.

The factory default certificate is common to all devices of this model. ZyXEL recommends that you use this button to replace the factory default certificate with one that uses your ZyXEL Device's MAC address.

This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.

This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name.

This field displays what kind of certificate this is.

REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate.

Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request.

SELF represents a self-signed certificate.

*SELF represents the default self-signed certificate, which the ZyXEL

Device uses to sign imported trusted remote host certificates.

CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

295

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 95 Security > Certificates > My Certificates (continued)

LABEL

Subject

Issuer

Valid From

Valid To

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),

O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.

Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate.

You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.

Do the following to delete a certificate that shows *SELF in the Type field.

1. Make sure that no other features, such as HTTPS, VPN, SSH are configured to use the *SELF certificate.

2. Click the Edit icon next to another self-signed certificate (see the description on the Create button if you need to create a self-signed certificate).

Create

Import

Refresh

3. Select the Default self-signed certificate which signs the

imported remote host certificates check box.

4. Click Apply to save the changes and return to the My Certificates screen.

5. The certificate that originally showed *SELF displays SELF and you can delete it now.

Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action

Click Create to go to the screen where you can have the ZyXEL Device generate a certificate or a certification request.

Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates.

296

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

15.3 My Certificate Details

Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen (see

Figure 175 on page 295 ). Click the edit icon to open the My

Certificate Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificate’s name.

If it is a self-signed certificate, you can also set the ZyXEL Device to use the certificate to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates.

Figure 176 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

297

Chapter 15 Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 96 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).

Property

Default selfsigned certificate which signs the imported remote host certificates.

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device use this certificate to sign the trusted remote host certificates that you import to the ZyXEL

Device. This check box is only available with self-signed certificates.

If this check box is already selected, you cannot clear it in this screen, you must select this check box in another self-signed certificate’s details screen. This automatically clears the check box in the details screen of the certificate that was previously set to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates.

Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself).

Refresh

Certificate

Information

Type

Version

Serial Number

Subject

Issuer

Signature

Algorithm

If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The ZyXEL Device does not trust the certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.

Click Refresh to display the certification path.

These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.

This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). “X.509” means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.

This field displays the X.509 version number.

This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the ZyXEL Device.

This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),

Organization (O) and Country (C).

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational

Unit, Organization and Country.

With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field.

This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The ZyXEL Device uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA publicprivate key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm).

Some certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA publicprivate key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).

298

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 96 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Details (continued)

LABEL

Valid From

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.

The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

Valid To

Key Algorithm

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example).

This field displays the certificate owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).

Subject

Alternative Name

Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used.

For example, “DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and “KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.

Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path.

MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm.

SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm.

Certificate in PEM

(Base-64)

Encoded Format

This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.

Back

Export

Apply

Cancel

You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority’s web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment.

You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution

(via floppy disk for example).

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The

Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name, except in the case of a self-signed certificate, which you can also set to be the default self-signed certificate that signs the imported trusted remote host certificates.

Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

You can only import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the ZyXEL Device (the certification request contains the private key). The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

299

Chapter 15 Certificates

One exception is that you can import a PKCS#12 format certificate without a corresponding certification request since the certificate includes the private key.

Note: Remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you import it.

Certificate File Formats

The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

• Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for

X.509 certificates.

• PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64

ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form.

• Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data

(including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. The ZyXEL Device currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate.

• PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses

64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form.

• Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates. The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The file’s password is not connected to your certificate’s public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the ZyXEL Device.

Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default.

300

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

15.3.1 Using the My Certificate Import Screen

Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates and then Import to open the

My Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the ZyXEL Device.

Figure 177 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 97 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Import

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to clear your settings.

15.4 My Certificate Create

Click Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create to open the My

Certificate Create screen. Use this screen to have the ZyXEL Device create a

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

301

Chapter 15 Certificates self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request.

Figure 178 Security > Certificates > My Certificate Create

302

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 98 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create

LABEL

Certificate Name

DESCRIPTION

Type up to 31 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.

Subject

Information

Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although the

Common Name is mandatory. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate’s owner by IP address, domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 31 ASCII characters. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.

Organizational Unit Type up to 127 characters to identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 98 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create (continued)

LABEL

Organization

DESCRIPTION

Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.

Country

Key Length

Type up to 127 characters to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.

Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should use (512 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space.

Enrollment Options These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated.

Create a selfsigned certificate

Select Create a self-signed certificate to have the ZyXEL Device generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates.

Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment

Select Create a certification request and save it locally for

later manual enrollment to have the ZyXEL Device generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority.

Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online

Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen (see

Section 15.3 on page 297 ) and then send it to the

certification authority.

Select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate

immediately online to have the ZyXEL Device generate a request for a certificate and apply to a certification authority for a certificate.

You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen.

When you select this option, you must select the certification authority’s enrollment protocol and the certification authority’s certificate from the drop-down list boxes and enter the certification authority’s server address. You also need to fill in the Reference

Number and Key if the certification authority requires them.

Select the certification authority’s enrollment protocol from the dropdown list box.

Enrollment

Protocol

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by VeriSign and Cisco.

Certificate Management Protocol (CMP) is a TCP-based enrollment protocol that was developed by the Public Key

Infrastructure X.509 working group of the Internet Engineering Task

Force (IETF) and is specified in RFC 2510.

CA Server Address Enter the IP address (or URL) of the certification authority server.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

303

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 98 Security > Certificates > My Certificates > Create (continued)

LABEL

CA Certificate

DESCRIPTION

Select the certification authority’s certificate from the CA

Certificate drop-down list box.

Request

Authentication

Key

Back

Apply

Cancel

You must have the certification authority’s certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen. Click Trusted CAs to go to the

Trusted CAs screen where you can view (and manage) the ZyXEL

Device's list of certificates of trusted certification authorities.

When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a

certificate immediately online, the certification authority may want you to include a reference number and key to identify you when you send a certification request. Fill in both the Reference

Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses CMP enrollment protocol. Just fill in the Key field if your certification authority uses the SCEP enrollment protocol.

Type the key that the certification authority gave you.

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation.

Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen.

After you click Apply in the My Certificate Create screen, you see a screen that tells you the ZyXEL Device is generating the self-signed certificate or certification request.

After the ZyXEL Device successfully enrolls a certificate or generates a certification request or a self-signed certificate, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificates screen.

If you configured the My Certificate Create screen to have the ZyXEL Device enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificate Create screen. Click Return and check your information in the My Certificate Create screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the ZyXEL Device to enroll a certificate online.

15.5 Trusted CAs

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen.

This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being

304

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities.

Figure 179 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 99 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs

LABEL

PKI Storage

Space in Use

#

Name

Subject

Issuer

Valid From

Valid To

DESCRIPTION

This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from blue to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.

This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.

This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),

O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field.

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

305

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 99 Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs (continued)

LABEL

CRL Issuer

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This field displays Yes if the certification authority issues Certificate

Revocation Lists for the certificates that it has issued and you have selected the Issues certificate revocation lists (CRL) check box in the certificate’s details screen to have the ZyXEL Device check the CRL before trusting any certificates issued by the certification authority.

Otherwise the field displays “No”.

Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.

Import

Refresh

Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificates. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.

Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL

Device.

Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.

15.6 Trusted CA Import

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen and then click Import to open the Trusted CA Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certification authority’s certificate to the ZyXEL Device.

Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import the certificate.

Figure 180 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import

306

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 100 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen.

15.7 Trusted CA Details

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen.

Click the details icon to open the Trusted CA Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate, change the certificate’s name and set whether or not you want the ZyXEL Device to check a

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

307

Chapter 15 Certificates certification authority’s list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority.

Figure 181 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details

308

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 101 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).

Property

Issues certificate revocation lists

(CRLs)

Select this check box to have the ZyXEL Device check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a

Certificate Revocation List (CRL).

Certificate Path

Refresh

Certificate

Information

Type

Version

Serial Number

Subject

Issuer

Clear this check box to have the ZyXEL Device not check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a

Certificate Revocation List (CRL).

Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entity’s certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entity’s own certificate). The ZyXEL Device does not trust the end entity’s certificate and displays “Not trusted” in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked.

Click Refresh to display the certification path.

These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.

This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificate’s owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.

This field displays the X.509 version number.

This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the certification authority.

This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),

Organization (O) and Country (C).

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational

Unit, Organization and Country.

Signature

Algorithm

Valid From

With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the

Subject Name field.

This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5

(RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm).

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.

The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

309

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 101 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Details (continued)

LABEL

Valid To

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

Key Algorithm

Subject

Alternative Name

Key Usage

This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example).

This field displays the certificate’s owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).

This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used.

For example, “DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and “KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.

Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path.

CRL Distribution

Points

This field displays how many directory servers with Lists of revoked certificates the issuing certification authority of this certificate makes available. This field also displays the domain names or IP addresses of the servers.

MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.

SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate.

Certificate in PEM

(Base-64)

Encoded Format

This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.

Back

Export

Apply

Cancel

You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The

Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name and/or set whether or not you want the ZyXEL

Device to check the CRL that the certification authority issues before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority.

Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen.

310

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

15.8 Trusted Remote Hosts

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted

Remote Hosts screen. This screen displays a list of the certificates of peers that you trust but which are not signed by one of the certification authorities on the

Trusted CAs screen.

You do not need to add any certificate that is signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen since the ZyXEL Device automatically accepts any valid certificate signed by a trusted certification authority as being trustworthy.

Figure 182 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 102 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts

LABEL

PKI Storage

Space in Use

Issuer (My

Default Selfsigned

Certificate)

#

DESCRIPTION

This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.

This field displays identifying information about the default self-signed certificate on the ZyXEL Device that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates.

Name

This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order.

This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

311

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 102 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts (continued)

LABEL

Subject

Valid From

Valid To

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),

O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

Click the Edit icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate.

Import

Refresh

Click the Remove icon to remove the certificate. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.

Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a remote host (which you trust) from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates.

15.9 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted

Remote Hosts screen. Click the details icon to open the Trusted Remote Host

312

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Details screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the trusted remote host’s certificate and/or change the certificate’s name.

Figure 183 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 103 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details

LABEL

Certificate Name

Certificate Path

Refresh

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).

Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entity’s own certificate and a list of certification authority certificates in the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate a certificate’s issuing certification authority. For a trusted host, the list consists of the end entity’s own certificate and the default self-signed certificate that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign remote host certificates.

Click Refresh to display the certification path.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

313

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 103 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details (continued)

LABEL

Certificate Path

Type

Version

Serial Number

Subject

Issuer

Signature

Algorithm

Valid From

Valid To

Key Algorithm

Subject Alternative

Name

Key Usage

Basic Constraint

MD5 Fingerprint

DESCRIPTION

These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate.

This field displays general information about the certificate. With trusted remote host certificates, this field always displays CA-signed.

The ZyXEL Device is the Certification Authority that signed the certificate. X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates.

This field displays the X.509 version number.

This field displays the certificate’s identification number given by the device that created the certificate.

This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),

Organization (O) and Country (C).

This field displays identifying information about the default selfsigned certificate on the ZyXEL Device that the ZyXEL Device uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates.

This field displays the type of algorithm that the ZyXEL Device used to sign the certificate, which is rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm).

This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable.

The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable.

This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired.

This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate’s key pair (the ZyXEL Device uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example).

This field displays the certificate’s owner‘s IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL).

This field displays for what functions the certificate’s key can be used. For example, “DigitalSignature” means that the key can be used to sign certificates and “KeyEncipherment” means that the key can be used to encrypt text.

This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authority’s certificate and “Path Length Constraint=1” means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate’s path.

This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote host’s actual certificate because the

ZyXEL Device has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote hosts actual certificate. See

Section 15.1.3 on page 293 for how to verify a remote host’s

certificate.

314

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 103 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Details (continued)

LABEL

SHA1 Fingerprint

Certificate in PEM

(Base-64) Encoded

Format

DESCRIPTION

This is the certificate’s message digest that the ZyXEL Device calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You cannot use this value to verify that this is the remote host’s actual certificate because the

ZyXEL Device has signed the certificate; thus causing this value to be different from that of the remote hosts actual certificate. See

Section 15.1.3 on page 293 for how to verify a remote host’s

certificate.

This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.

Back

Export

Apply

Cancel

You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The

Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device. You can only change the name of the certificate.

Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the

Trusted Remote Hosts screen.

15.10 Trusted Remote Hosts Import

Click Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted

Remote Hosts screen and then click Import to open the Trusted Remote Host

Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted host’s certificate to the ZyXEL Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

315

Chapter 15 Certificates

Note: The trusted remote host certificate must be a self-signed certificate; and you must remove any spaces from its filename before you can import it.

Figure 184 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Import

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 104 Security > Certificates > Trusted Remote Hosts > Import

LABEL DESCRIPTION

File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it.

Back

Apply

Cancel

Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save the certificate on the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen.

15.11 Directory Servers

Click Security > Certificates > Directory Servers to open the Directory

Servers screen. This screen displays a summary list of directory servers (that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates) that have been saved into the ZyXEL

Device. If you decide to have the ZyXEL Device check incoming certificates against the issuing certification authority’s list of revoked certificates, the ZyXEL Device first checks the server(s) listed in the CRL Distribution Points field of the

316

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates incoming certificate. If the certificate does not list a server or the listed server is not available, the ZyXEL Device checks the servers listed here.

Figure 185 Security > Certificates > Directory Servers

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 105 Security > Certificates > Directory Servers

LABEL

PKI Storage

Space in Use

#

Name

Address

Port

Protocol

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This bar displays the percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s PKI storage space that is currently in use. The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached. When the bar is red, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates.

The index number of the directory server. The servers are listed in alphabetical order.

This field displays the name used to identify this directory server.

This field displays the IP address or domain name of the directory server.

This field displays the port number that the directory server uses.

This field displays the protocol that the directory server uses.

Click the Edit icon to open a screen where you can change the information about the directory server.

Add

Click the Remove icon to remove the directory server entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the directory server. Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action.

Click Add to open a screen where you can configure information about a directory server so that the ZyXEL Device can access it.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

317

Chapter 15 Certificates

15.12 Directory Server Add and Edit

Click Security > Certificates > Directory Servers to open the Directory

Servers screen. Click Add (or the details icon) to open the Directory Server

Add screen. Use this screen to configure information about a directory server that the ZyXEL Device can access.

Figure 186 Security > Certificates > Directory Server > Add

318

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 106 Security > Certificates > Directory Server > Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Directory

Service Setting

Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters (spaces are not permitted) to identify this directory server.

Access Protocol Use the drop-down list box to select the access protocol used by the directory server.

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of certificates and lists of revoked certificates.

A

Server Address Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) or the domain name of the directory server.

Server Port This field displays the default server port number of the protocol that you select in the Access Protocol field.

You may change the server port number if needed, however you must use the same server port number that the directory server uses.

389 is the default server port number for LDAP.

Login Setting

Login The ZyXEL Device may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the directory server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the directory server (usually a certification authority).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 15 Certificates

Table 106 Security > Certificates > Directory Server > Add

LABEL

Password

Back

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the directory server (usually a certification authority).

Click Back to return to the Directory Servers screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen.

A.

At the time of writing, LDAP is the only choice of directory server access protocol.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

319

Chapter 15 Certificates

320

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 6

Static Route

16.1 Overview

The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.

For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL

Device’s LAN interface. The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the

Internet through the ZyXEL Device’s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN.

Figure 187 Example of Static Routing Topology

A

R1

Internet

LAN

WAN

R3

R2

16.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens

Use the Static Route screens ( Section 16.2 on page 322 ) to view and configure

IP static routes on the ZyXEL Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

321

Chapter 16 Static Route

16.2 Configuring Static Route

Click Advanced > Static Route to open the Static Route screen.

Figure 188 Advanced > Static Route

322

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 107 Advanced > Static Route

LABEL

#

Active

DESCRIPTION

This is the number of an individual static route.

This field indicates whether the rule is active or not.

Name

Destination

Netmask

Gateway

Modify

Apply

Cancel

Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.

This is the name that describes or identifies this route.

This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.

Routing is always based on network number.

This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.

This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.

Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the ZyXEL Device.

Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.

Click this to apply your changes to the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to return to the previously saved configuration.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 16 Static Route

16.2.1 Static Route Edit

Select a static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears.

Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route.

Figure 189 Advanced > Static Route > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 108 Advanced > Static Route > Edit

LABEL

Active

Route Name

Destination IP

Address

DESCRIPTION

This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.

Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route.

This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.

Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host

ID.

Enter the IP subnet mask here.

IP Subnet

Mask

Gateway IP

Address

Back

Apply

Cancel

Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.

Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

323

Chapter 16 Static Route

324

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 7

802.1Q/1P

17.1 Overview

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. A VLAN group can be treated as an individual device. Each group can have its own rules about where and how to forward traffic.

You can assign any ports on the ZyXEL Device to a VLAN group and configure the settings for the group. You may also set the priority level for traffic transmitted through the ports.

Figure 190 802.1Q/1P

Ports

802.1Q

VLAN Groups

802.1P

Priority Levels

17.1.1 What You Can Do in the 802.1Q/1P Screens

• Use the Group Setting screen (

Section 17.2 on page 332 ) to activate 802.1Q/

1P, specify the management VLAN group, display the VLAN groups and configure the settings for each VLAN group.

• Use the Port Setting screen (

Section 17.3 on page 335

) to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port.

17.1.2 What You Need to Know About 802.1Q/1P

IEEE 802.1P Priority

IEEE 802.1P specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service.

325

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN

Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the

VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the device on which they were created. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network.

PVC

A virtual circuit is a logical point-to-point circuit between customer sites.

Permanent means that the circuit is preprogrammed by the carrier as a path through the network. It does not need to be set up or torn down for each session.

Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames

Each port on the device is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware device to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device, the ZyXEL Device first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware device to an

802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the ZyXEL Device first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.

Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress port on a per-VLAN, per-port basis (recall that a port can belong to multiple VLANs). If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame, then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame; otherwise, it is transmitted as an untagged frame.

326

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

17.1.3 802.1Q/1P Example

This example shows how to configure the 802.1Q/1P settings on the ZyXEL

Device.

Figure 191 802.1Q/1P Example

ZyXEL Device

1

2

3

4

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

VoIP Network

Internet - (PPPoE)

Internet - (PPPoE)

LAN1 and LAN2 are connected to ATAs (Analog Telephone Adapters) and used for

VoIP traffic. You want to set a high priority for this type of traffic, so you will group these ports into one VLAN (VLAN2) and then set them to use a PVC (PVC1) with a high priority service level. You would start with the following steps.

1

Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit to display the following screen.

2

In the Name field type VoIP to identify the group.

3

In the VLAN ID field type in 2 to identify the VLAN group.

4

Select PVC1 from the Default Gateway drop-down list box.

5

In the Control field, select Fixed for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1 to be permanent members of the VLAN group.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

327

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

6

Click Apply.

Figure 192 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit: Example

328

To set a high priority for VoIP traffic, follow these steps.

1

Click Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting to display the following screen.

2

Type 2 in the 802.1Q PVID column for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1.

3

Select 7 from the 802.1P Priority drop-down list box for LAN1, LAN2 and PVC1.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

4

Click Apply.

Figure 193 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting: Example

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

Ports 3 and 4 are connected to desktop computers and are used for Internet traffic. You want to set a lower priority for this type of traffic, so you want to group these ports and PVC2 into one VLAN (VLAN3). PVC2 priority is set to low level of service.

SSID1 and SSID2 are two wireless networks. You want to create medium priority for this type of traffic, so you want to group these ports and PVC3 into one VLAN

(VLAN4). PVC3 priority is set to medium level of service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

329

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

Follow the same steps as in VLAN2 to configure the settings for VLAN3 and VLAN4.

The summary screen should display as follows.

Figure 194 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting: Example

330

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

The port screen should look like this.

Figure 195 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting: Example

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

This completes the 802.1Q/1P setup.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

331

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

17.2 The 802.1Q/1P Group Setting Screen

Use this screen to activate 802.1Q/1P and display the VLAN groups. Click

Advanced > 802.1Q/1P to display the following screen.

Figure 196 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting

332

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 109 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting

LABEL

802.1P/1Q

Active

Management Vlan

ID

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to activate the 802.1P/1Q feature.

Enter the ID number of a VLAN group. All interfaces (ports, SSIDs and

PVCs) are in the management VLAN by default. If you disable the management VLAN, you will not be able to access the ZyXEL Device.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

Table 109 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting (continued)

LABEL

Summary

#

Name

VID

Port Number

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the index number of the VLAN group.

This field displays the name of the VLAN group.

This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.

These columns display the VLAN’s settings for each port. A tagged port is marked as T, an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as ““.

Click the Edit button to configure the ports in the VLAN group.

Apply

Cancel

Click the Remove button to delete the VLAN group.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

17.2.1 Editing 802.1Q/1P Group Setting

Use this screen to configure the settings for each VLAN group.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

333

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

In the 802.1Q/1P screen, click the Edit button from the Modify filed to display the following screen.

Figure 197 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit

334

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 110 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit

LABEL

Name

VLAN ID

DESCRIPTION

Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes.

The text may consist of up to 8 letters, numerals, “-”, “_” and “@”.

Assign a VLAN ID for the VLAN group. The valid VID range is between 1 and 4094.

Select the default gateway for the VLAN group.

Default

Gateway

Ports This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

Table 110 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Group Setting > Edit (continued)

LABEL

Control

DESCRIPTION

Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of the VLAN group.

Tx Tag

Back

Apply

Cancel

Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining the VLAN group.

Select Tx Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing traffic transmitted through this VLAN. You select this if you want to create

VLANs across different devices and not just the ZyXEL Device.

Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

17.3 The 802.1Q/1P Port Setting Screen

Use this screen to configure the PVID and assign traffic priority for each port. Click

Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting to display the following screen.

Figure 198 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

335

Chapter 17 802.1Q/1P

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 111 Advanced > 802.1Q/1P > Port Setting

LABEL

Ports

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the types of ports available to join the VLAN group.

802.1Q PVID Assign a VLAN ID for the port. The valid VID range is between 1 and

4094. The ZyXEL Device assigns the PVID to untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port, SSID, or PVC.

802.1P Priority Assign a priority for the traffic transmitted through the port, SSID, or

PVC. Select Same if you do not want to modify the priority. You may choose a priority level from 0-7, with 0 being the lowest level and 7 being the highest level.

Apply

Cancel

Click this to save your changes.

Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

336

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 8

Quality of Service (QoS)

This chapter contains information about configuring QoS, editing classifiers and viewing the ZyXEL Device’s QoS packet statistics.

18.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the ZyXEL Device’s QoS screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device to use QoS for traffic management.

Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. QoS allows the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance.

Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.

The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as

Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video.

• See

Section 18.5 on page 349 for advanced technical information on SIP.

18.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens

• Use the General screen (

Section 18.2 on page 341

) to enable QoS on the

ZyXEL Device, decide allowable bandwidth using QoS and configure priority mapping settings for traffic that does not match a custom class.

• Use the Class Setup screen (

Section 18.3 on page 343 ) to set up classifiers to

sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

337

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

• Use the Monitor screen ( Section 18.4 on page 349

) to view the ZyXEL Device’s

QoS-related packet statistics.

18.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS

QoS versus Cos

QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.

CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated

Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.

Tagging and Marking

In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ

Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.

18.1.3 QoS Class Setup Example

In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue

(6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the boss’s IP address

(192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match

338

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device.

Figure 199 QoS Example

VoIP: Queue 6

DSL

50 Mbps

Internet

Boss: Queue 5

IP=192.168.1.23

Figure 200 QoS Class Example: VoIP -1

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

339

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

Figure 201 QoS Class Example: VoIP -2

Figure 202 QoS Class Example: Boss -1

340

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Figure 203 QoS Class Example: Boss -2

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

18.2 The QoS General Screen

Click Advanced > QoS to open the screen as shown next. Use this screen to enable or disable QoS, and select to have the ZyXEL Device automatically assign

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

341

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) priority to traffic according to the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length.

Figure 204 Advanced > QoS > General

342

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 112 Advanced > QoS > General

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Active QoS Select the check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.

WAN

Managed

Bandwidth

You can give priority to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.

Enter the amount of bandwidth for the WAN interface that you want to allocate using QoS.

The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface’s actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interface speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100

Mbps.

Setting this number higher than the interface’s actual transmission speed will stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth.

Traffic priority will be automatical ly assigned by

If you set this number lower than the interface’s actual transmission speed, the ZyXEL Device will not use some of the interface’s available bandwidth.

These fields are ignored if traffic matches a class you configured in the

Class Setup screen.

If you select ON and traffic does not match a class configured in the Class

Setup screen, the ZyXEL Device assigns priority to unmatched traffic based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length. See

Section 18.5.4 on page 351 for more information.

If you select OFF, traffic which does not match a class is mapped to queue two.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

Table 112 Advanced > QoS > General

LABEL

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Click Apply to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

18.3 The Class Setup Screen

Use this screen to add, edit or delete classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.

Click Advanced > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.

Figure 205 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 113 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup

LABEL

Create a new

Class

Order

DESCRIPTION

Click Add to create a new classifier.

Active

Name

Interface

This is the number of each classifier. The ordering of the classifiers is important as the classifiers are applied in turn.

Select the check box to enable this classifier.

This is the name of the classifier.

This shows the interface from which traffic of this classifier should come.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

343

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

Table 113 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup (continued)

LABEL

Priority

Filter Content

Modify

DESCRIPTION

This is the priority assigned to traffic of this classifier.

This shows criteria specified in this classifier.

Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the classifier.

Apply

Cancel

Click the Remove icon to delete an existing classifier.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

344

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

18.3.1 The Class Configuration Screen

Click the Add button or the Edit icon in the Modify field to configure a classifier.

Figure 206 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

345

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

See Appendix E on page 531 for a list of commonly-used services. The following

table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 114 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add

LABEL

Class

Configuration

Active

Name

Interface

Priority

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to enable this classifier.

Enter a descriptive name of up to 20 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces.

Select from which interface traffic of this class should come.

Select a priority level (between 0 and 7) or select Auto to have the

ZyXEL Device map the matched traffic to a queue according to the internal QoS mapping table. See

Section 18.5.4 on page 351

for more information.

Routing Policy

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.

Select the next hop to which traffic of this class should be forwarded.

WAN Index

Gateway

Address

Order

Select By Routing Table to have the ZyXEL Device use the routing table to find a next hop and forward the matched packets automatically.

Select To Gateway Address to route the matched packets to the router or switch you specified in the Gateway Address field.

This field in not configurable at the time of writing.

Enter the IP address of the gateway, which should be a router or switch on the same segment as the ZyXEL Device’s interface(s), that can forward the packet to the destination.

This shows the ordering number of this classifier. Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier and click Apply to move the classifier to the number you selected. For example, if you select 2, the classifier you are moving becomes number 2 and the previous classifier 2 gets pushed down one.

Tag Configuration

DSCP Value Select Same to keep the DSCP fields in the packets.

Select Auto to map the DSCP value to 802.1 priority level automatically.

Select Mark to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the field provided.

346

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

Table 114 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add (continued)

LABEL

802.1Q Tag

DESCRIPTION

Select Same to keep the priority setting and VLAN ID of the frames.

Select Auto to map the 802.1 priority level to the DSCP value automatically.

Select Remove to delete the priority queue tag and VLAN ID of the frames.

Select Mark to replace the 802.1 priority field and VLAN ID with the value you set in the fields below.

Select Add to treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second priority queue tag and VLAN.

Select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box.

Ethernet

Priority

VLAN ID

Filter

Configuration

Source

Address

Specify a VLAN ID number between 2 and 4094.

Use the following fields to configure the criteria for traffic classification.

Subnet

Netmask

Port

MAC

MAC Mask

Exclude

Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address.

Enter the source subnet mask. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting.

Select the check box and enter the port number of the source. 0

means any source port number. See Appendix E on page 531 for some

common services and port numbers.

Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.

Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.

Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to

00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a

MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.

Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.

Destination

Address

Subnet

Netmask

Port

MAC

Select the check box and enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Enter the destination subnet mask. Refer to the appendix for more information on IP subnetting.

Select the check box and enter the port number of the destination. 0

means any source port number. See Appendix E on page 531 for some

common services and port numbers.

Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

347

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

Table 114 Advanced > QoS > Class Setup > Add (continued)

LABEL

MAC Mask

DESCRIPTION

Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.

Exclude

Enter “f” for each bit of the specified destination MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to

00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a

MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.

Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.

Others

Service This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields.

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is a signaling protocol used in

Internet telephony, instant messaging and other VoIP (Voice over IP) applications. Select the check box and select VoIP(SIP) from the drop-down list box to configure this classifier for traffic that uses SIP.

Protocol

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP/IP networks. A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. The service allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files. Select the check box and select FTP from the drop-down list box to configure this classifier for FTP traffic.

Select this option and select the protocol (TCP or UDP) or select User

defined and enter the protocol (service type) number. 0 means any protocol number.

Packet Length

DSCP

Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 28 to 1500) in the fields provided.

Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.

Ethernet Priority Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop down list box.

VLAN ID

Physical Port

Exclude

TCP ACK

Back

Apply

Cancel

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.

Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number between 2 and 4094.

Select this option and select a LAN port.

Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.

Select this option to set this classifier for TCP ACK (acknowledgement) packets.

Click Back to go to the previous screen.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

348

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

18.4 The QoS Monitor Screen

To view the ZyXEL Device’s QoS packet statistics, click Advanced > QoS >

Monitor. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 207 Advanced > QoS > Monitor

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 115 Advanced > QoS > Monitor

LABEL

Priority Queue

DESCRIPTION

This shows the priority queue number.

Pass

Drop

Poll Interval(s)

Set Interval

Stop

Traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.

This shows how many packets mapped to this priority queue are transmitted successfully.

This shows how many packets mapped to this priority queue are dropped.

Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.

Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll

Interval(s) field.

Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.

18.5 QoS Technical Reference

This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

349

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

18.5.1 IEEE 802.1Q Tag

The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the

12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network.

IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).

Table 116 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type

PRIORITY

LEVEL

Level 7

TRAFFIC TYPE

Level 6

Level 5

Level 4

Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

Level 0

Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.

Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).

Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.

Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA

(Systems Network Architecture) transactions.

Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.

This is for “spare bandwidth”.

This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

Typically used for best-effort traffic.

18.5.2 IP Precedence

Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eightbit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services

(ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.

18.5.3 DiffServ

QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types.

350

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS)

DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow.

Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.

DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior

DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of

Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.

DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the

DSCP mapping.

DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)

The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.

18.5.4 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment

If you enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.

The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ZyXEL Device. On the ZyXEL Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

351

Chapter 18 Quality of Service (QoS) gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.

Table 117 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping

LAYER 2 LAYER 3

PRIORITY

QUEUE

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

7

0

3

1

2

IEEE 802.1P

USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET

PRIORITY)

4

5

6

7

TOS (IP

PRECEDENCE)

DSCP

0

6

7

0

1

2

3

4

5

000000

010000

011110

011100

011010

011000

100110

100100

100010

000000

001110

001100

001010

001000

010110

010100

010010

100000

101110

101000

110000

111000

IP PACKET

LENGTH (BYTE)

>1100

250~1100

<250

352

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 1 9

Dynamic DNS Setup

This chapter discusses how to configure your ZyXEL Device to use Dynamic DNS.

19.1 Overview

Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in applications such as NetMeeting and CU-SeeMe). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.

First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

19.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen

Use the Dynamic DNS screen (

Section 19.2 on page 354 ) to enable DDNS and

configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device.

19.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS

DYNDNS Wildcard

Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.

If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.

353

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup

19.2 Configuring Dynamic DNS

To change your ZyXEL Device’s DDNS, click Advanced > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown.

See Section 19.1 on page 353 for more information.

Figure 208 Advanced > Dynamic DNS

354

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 118 Advanced > Dynamic DNS

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Dynamic DNS Setup

Active

Dynamic DNS

Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.

Service

Provider

This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Dynamic DNS

Type

Host Name

Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic

DNS service provider.

Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic

DNS provider.

User Name

Password

You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma

(",").

Type your user name.

Type the password assigned to you.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup

Table 118 Advanced > Dynamic DNS (continued)

LABEL

Enable

Wildcard

Option

DESCRIPTION

Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.

Enable off line option

This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line.

IP Address Update Policy

Use WAN IP

Address

Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to the

WAN IP address.

Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP

Address

Select this option only when there are one or more NAT routers between the ZyXEL Device and the DDNS server. This feature has the DDNS server automatically detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP address.

Use specified

IP Address

Apply

Cancel

Note: The DDNS server may not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the ZyXEL

Device and the DDNS server.

Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP address.

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

355

Chapter 19 Dynamic DNS Setup

356

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 0

Remote Management

Configuration

20.1 Overview

Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which ZyXEL Device interface (if any) from which computers.The following figure shows remote management of the ZyXEL Device coming in from the WAN.

Figure 209 Remote Management From the WAN

LAN WAN

HTTP

Telnet

Internet

Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access.

You may manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location via:

• Internet (WAN only)

• ALL (LAN and WAN)

• LAN only,

• Neither (Disable).

Note: When you choose WAN only or LAN & WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access.

To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding

Access Status field.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

357

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The ZyXEL

Device automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows.

1

Telnet

2

HTTP

20.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens

• Use the WWW screen (

Section 20.2 on page 359 ) to configure through which

interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the

ZyXEL Device.

• Use the Telnet screen ( Section 20.3 on page 360 ) to configure through which

interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the

ZyXEL Device.

• Use the FTP screen (

Section 20.4 on page 361

) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the

ZyXEL Device.

• Use the SNMP screen (

Section 20.5 on page 362 ) to configure your ZyXEL

Device’s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management.

• Use the DNS screen (

Section 20.6 on page 365 ) to configure through which

interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the

ZyXEL Device.

• Use the ICMP screen ( Section 20.7 on page 366

) to set whether or not your

ZyXEL Device will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available.

20.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management

Remote Management Limitations

Remote management does not work when:

• You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen.

• You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.

• The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the ZyXEL Device will disconnect the session immediately.

• There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time.

• There is a firewall rule that blocks it.

358

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Remote Management and NAT

When NAT is enabled:

• Use the ZyXEL Device’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.

• Use the ZyXEL Device’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

System Timeout

There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling.

20.2 The WWW Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s World Wide Web settings, click Advanced >

Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen.

Figure 210 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 119 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW

LABEL

Port

Access Status

DESCRIPTION

You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL

Device using this service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

359

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 119 Advanced > Remote Management > WWW

LABEL

Secured Client

IP

DESCRIPTION

A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Apply

Cancel

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Click Apply to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.3 The Telnet Screen

You can use Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device’s command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown.

Figure 211 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet

360

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 120 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet

LABEL

Port

DESCRIPTION

You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Access Status Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL

Device using this service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 120 Advanced > Remote Management > Telnet

LABEL

Secured Client

IP

DESCRIPTION

A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Apply

Cancel

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.4 The FTP Screen

You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the ZyXEL

Device’s firmware and configuration files, please see the User’s Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s FTP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT >

FTP. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come.

Figure 212 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 121 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP

LABEL

Port

Access Status

DESCRIPTION

You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the ZyXEL

Device using this service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

361

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 121 Advanced > Remote Management > FTP

LABEL

Secured Client

IP

DESCRIPTION

A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Apply

Cancel

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.5 The SNMP Screen

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. SNMP is a member of the

TCP/IP protocol suite. Your ZyXEL Device supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the ZyXEL Device through the network. The ZyXEL Device supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation.

Note: SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.

Figure 213 SNMP Management Model

362

An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the

ZyXEL Device). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.

The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received and node port status. A Management

Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:

• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.

• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.

• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.

• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.

Supported MIBs

The ZyXEL Device supports MIB II, which is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215.

The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance.

SNMP Traps

The ZyXEL Device will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs:

Table 122 SNMP Traps

TRAP #

0

1

4

6

TRAP NAME coldStart (defined in RFC-

1215) warmStart (defined in RFC-

1215) authenticationFailure (defined in RFC-1215) whyReboot (defined in ZYXEL-

MIB)

DESCRIPTION

A trap is sent after booting (power on).

A trap is sent after booting (software reboot).

A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any SNMP get or set requirements with the wrong community (password).

A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart

(warm start).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

363

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 122 SNMP Traps

TRAP #

6a

TRAP NAME

For intentional reboot:

6b For fatal error:

DESCRIPTION

A trap is sent with the message "System reboot by user!" if reboot is done intentionally, (for example, download new files, CI command "sys reboot").

A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors.

20.5.1 Configuring SNMP

To change your ZyXEL Device’s SNMP settings, click Advanced > Remote MGMT

> SNMP. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 214 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP

364

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 123 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP

LABEL

SNMP

Port

DESCRIPTION

Access Status

You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.

Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the

ZyXEL Device using this service.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 123 Advanced > Remote Management > SNMP

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Secured Client IP A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Select All to allow any computer to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

SNMP Configuration

Get Community Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming

Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.

Set Community

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the ZyXEL Device using this service.

Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests.

Trap

Community

Destination

Apply

Cancel

Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests.

Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.6 The DNS Screen

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Refer to

Chapter 7 on page 121 for background

information.

Click Advanced > Remote MGMT > DNS to change your ZyXEL Device’s DNS settings. Use this screen to set from which IP address the ZyXEL Device will accept

DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your ZyXEL Device’s DNS

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

365

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration settings. This feature is not available when the ZyXEL Device is set to bridge mode.

Figure 215 Remote Management: DNS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 124 Remote Management: DNS

LABEL

Port

Access Status

Secured Client

IP

DESCRIPTION

The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here.

Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device.

A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device.

Apply

Cancel

Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL

Device.

Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.7 The ICMP Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s security settings, click Advanced > Remote

MGMT > ICMP. The screen appears as shown.

If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your ZyXEL Device, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the ZyXEL Device exists. Your ZyXEL Device supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your ZyXEL Device when unsupported ports are probed.

366

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services, you may also need to configure the firewall anti probing settings to match.

Figure 216 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 125 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP

LABEL

ICMP

Respond to

Ping on

DESCRIPTION

Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and errorreporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet.

ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user.

The ZyXEL Device will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when

Disable is selected.

Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services

• Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests.

• Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests.

• Select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.

• Select WLAN & WAN to reply to both incoming WLAN and WAN Ping requests.

• Select WLAN & LAN to reply to both incoming WLAN and LAN Ping requests.

• Select WLAN to reply to incoming WLAN Ping requests.

Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the ZyXEL Device by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the ZyXEL Device will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the ZyXEL Device unseen. If this option is not selected, the

ZyXEL Device will reply with an ICMP port unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports.

Note that the probing packets must first traverse the ZyXEL Device's firewall rule checks before reaching this anti-probing mechanism.

Therefore if a firewall rule stops a probing packet, the ZyXEL Device reacts based on the firewall rule to either send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet (or an ICMP port-unreachable packet for a blocked

UDP packets) or just drop the packets without sending a response packet.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

367

Chapter 20 Remote Management Configuration

Table 125 Advanced > Remote Management > ICMP

LABEL

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

368

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 1

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

21.1 Overview

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A

UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.

21.1.1 What You Can Do in the UPnP Screen

Use the UPnP screen ( Section 21.2 on page 371 ) to enable UPnP on the ZyXEL

Device and allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the ZyXEL

Device.

21.1.2 What You Need to Know About UPnP

How do I know if I'm using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder

(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.

NAT Traversal

UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

• Dynamic port mapping

• Learning public IP addresses

• Assigning lease times to mappings

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

369

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.

See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.

Cautions with UPnP

The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.

When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.

All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.

UPnP and ZyXEL

ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum

UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports

Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0.

See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.

370

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

21.2 The UPnP Screen

Click Advanced > UPnP to display the screen shown next. See

Section 21.1 on page 369 for more information.

Figure 217 Advanced > UPnP > General

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 126 Advanced > UPnP > General

LABEL

Active the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature

Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP

Apply

Cancel

DESCRIPTION

Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device's IP address

(although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).

Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the ZyXEL Device so that they can communicate through the ZyXEL Device, for example by using

NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.

Click Apply to save the setting to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.

21.3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example

This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

371

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

Installing UPnP in Windows Me

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.

1

Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

2

Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details.

Figure 218 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication

372

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

3

In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box.

Figure 219 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components

4

Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click

Next.

5

Restart the computer when prompted.

Installing UPnP in Windows XP

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.

1

Click Start and Control Panel.

2

Double-click Network Connections.

3

In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components ….

Figure 220 Network Connections

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

373

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

4

The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays.

Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.

Figure 221 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard

374

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

5

In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.

Figure 222 Networking Services

6

Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next.

21.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL

Device.

Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device.

Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device

1

Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

375

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

2

Right-click the icon and select Properties.

Figure 223 Network Connections

376

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

3

In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created.

Figure 224 Internet Connection Properties

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

377

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

4

You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.

Figure 225 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings

Figure 226 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add

378

5

When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

6

Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK.

An icon displays in the system tray.

Figure 227 System Tray Icon

7

Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.

Figure 228 Internet Connection Status

Web Configurator Easy Access

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device.

Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.

1

Click Start and then Control Panel.

2

Double-click Network Connections.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

379

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

3

Select My Network Places under Other Places.

Figure 229 Network Connections

380

4

An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local

Network.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

5

Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays.

Figure 230 Network Connections: My Network Places

6

Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device.

Figure 231 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

381

Chapter 21 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

382

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

P

ART

III

Maintenance,

Troubleshooting and Specifications

System (385)

Logs (391)

Tools (413)

Diagnostic (433)

Troubleshooting (437)

Product Specifications (445)

383

384

C H A P T E R 2 2

System

22.1 Overview

This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.

22.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens

• Use the General screen (

Section 22.2 on page 386

) to configure system settings.

• Use the Time Setting screen ( Section 22.3 on page 388 ) to set the system

time.

22.1.2 What You Need to Know About System Settings

Domain Name

This is a network address that identifies the owner of a network connection. For example, in the network address “www.zyxel.com/support/files”, the domain name is “www.zyxel.com”.

DHCP

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a method of allocating IP addresses to devices on a network from a DHCP Server. Often your ISP or a router on your network performs this function.

LAN

A LAN (local area network) is typically a network which covers a small area, made up of computers and other devices which share resources such as Internet access and printers.

385

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 22 System

22.2 The General Screen

Use the General screen to configure system settings such as the system and domain name, inactivity timeout interval and system password.

The System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name". Find the system name of your Windows computer by following one of the steps below.

• In Windows XP, click start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer

name field and enter it as the ZyXEL Device System Name.

Click Maintenance > System to open the General screen.

Figure 232 Maintenance > System > General

386

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 127 Maintenance > System > General

LABEL

General Setup

DESCRIPTION

System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. It is recommended you enter your computer’s “Computer name” in this field.

This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores "_" are accepted.

Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP.

The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 22 System

Table 127 Maintenance > System > General

LABEL

Administrator

Inactivity

Timer

DESCRIPTION

Type how many minutes a management session (either via the web configurator or telnet) can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended).

Password

Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field.

New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type.

After you change the password, use the new password to access the

ZyXEL Device.

Retype to

Confirm

Type the new password again for confirmation.

Apply

Cancel

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

387

Chapter 22 System

22.3 The Time Setting Screen

To change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > System >

Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the

ZyXEL Device’s time based on your local time zone.

Figure 233 Maintenance > System > Time Setting

388

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 128 Maintenance > System > Time Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Current Time and Date

Current Time This field displays the time of your ZyXEL Device.

Current Date

Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time with the time server.

This field displays the date of your ZyXEL Device.

Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the date with the time server.

Time and Date Setup

Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the

Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 22 System

Table 128 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued)

LABEL

New Time

DESCRIPTION

This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.

(hh:mm:ss)

New Date

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply.

This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually.

(yyyy/mm/dd)

Get from Time

Server

Time Protocol

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply.

Select this radio button to have the ZyXEL Device get the time and date from the time server you specified below.

Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the ZyXEL Device. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to check with your ISP/network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works.

The main difference between them is the format.

Daytime (RFC 867) format is day/month/year/time zone of the server.

Start Date

Time (RFC 868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.

Time Server

Address

The default, NTP (RFC 1305), is similar to Time (RFC 868).

Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.

Time Zone Setup

Time Zone

Daylight

Savings

Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.

Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.

Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field.

Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using

Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

389

Chapter 22 System

Table 128 Maintenance > System > Time Setting (continued)

LABEL

End Date

DESCRIPTION

Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format.

Here are a couple of examples:

Apply

Cancel

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of

November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight

Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field.

Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of

October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using

Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In

Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.

Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.

390

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 3

Logs

23.1 Overview

The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL

Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server.

23.1.1 What You Can Do in the Log Screens

• Use the View Log screen ( Section 23.2 on page 391 ) to see the logs for the

categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen.

• Use The Log Settings screen (

Section 23.3 on page 392

) to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs; the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device is to record.

23.1.2 What You Need To Know About Logs

Alerts and Logs

An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.

23.2 The View Log Screen

Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see

Section 23.3 on page 392

).

391

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Log entries in red indicate alerts. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order.

Figure 234 Maintenance > Logs > View Log

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 129 Maintenance > Logs > View Log

LABEL

Display

DESCRIPTION

The categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop-down list box.

Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page.

Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the E-mail Log Settings fields in Log Settings).

Refresh

Clear Log

#

Time

Message

Source

Destination

Notes

Click Refresh to renew the log screen.

Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.

This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.

This field displays the time the log was recorded.

This field states the reason for the log.

This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.

This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.

This field displays additional information about the log entry.

23.3 The Log Settings Screen

Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send logs; the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send the logs and which logs

392

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device is to record. See

Section 23.1 on page

391 for more information.

To change your ZyXEL Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs > Log

Settings. The screen appears as shown.

Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full. Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent.

Figure 235 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

393

Chapter 23 Logs

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 130 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

E-mail Log Settings

Mail Server

Mail Subject

Send Log to

Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.

Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Not all ZyXEL Device models have this field.

The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field.

If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e-mail.

Send Alerts to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs.

Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.

Enable SMTP

Authentication

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

User Name

Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-mail logs.

Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account).

Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.

Log Schedule This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

Day for

Sending Log

Time for

Sending Log

Clear log after sending mail

Syslog

Logging

Active

• Daily

• Weekly

• Hourly

• When Log is Full

• None.

If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.

Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs.

Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals

11:00 pm) to send the logs.

Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs.

The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server.

Click Active to enable syslog logging.

394

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 130 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings

LABEL

Syslog IP

Address

DESCRIPTION

Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs.

Log Facility

Send

Immediate

Alert

Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the syslog server manual for more information.

Active Log and Alert

Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record.

Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.

Apply

Cancel

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.

23.4 SMTP Error Messages

If there are difficulties in sending e-mail the following error message appears.

“SMTP action request failed. ret= ??". The “??"are described in the following table.

Table 131 SMTP Error Messages

-1 means ZyXEL Device out of socket

-2 means tcp SYN fail

-3 means smtp server OK fail

-4 means HELO fail

-5 means MAIL FROM fail

-6 means RCPT TO fail

-7 means DATA fail

-8 means mail data send fail

23.4.1 Example E-mail Log

An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.

• You may edit the subject title.

• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.

• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-

Second.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

395

Chapter 23 Logs

• "End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.

Figure 236 E-mail Log Example

Subject:

Firewall Alert From

Date:

Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42

From:

[email protected]

To:

[email protected]

1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward

| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |

3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward

| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |

……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..

……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..

126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward

| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |

End of Firewall Log

23.5 Log Descriptions

This section provides descriptions of example log messages.

Table 132 System Maintenance Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Time calibration is successful

Time calibration failed

WAN interface gets IP: %s

DHCP client IP expired

DHCP server assigns %s

Successful WEB login

WEB login failed

Successful TELNET login

TELNET login failed

Successful FTP login

DESCRIPTION

The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server.

The router failed to get information from the time server.

A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP,

PPPoE, or dial-up server.

A DHCP client's IP address has expired.

The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.

Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface.

Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.

Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.

Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.

396

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 132 System Maintenance Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE

FTP login failed

NAT Session Table is Full!

Starting Connectivity

Monitor

DESCRIPTION

Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.

The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full.

Starting Connectivity Monitor.

Time initialized by Daytime

Server

Time initialized by Time server

Time initialized by NTP server

The router got the time and date from the Daytime server.

The router got the time and date from the time server.

The router got the time and date from the NTP server.

Connect to Daytime server fail

Connect to Time server fail

Connect to NTP server fail

Too large ICMP packet has been dropped

Configuration Change: PC =

0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x

The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server.

The router was not able to connect to the Time server.

The router was not able to connect to the NTP server.

The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large.

The router is saving configuration changes.

Successful SSH login

SSH login failed

Successful HTTPS login

HTTPS login failed

Someone has logged on to the router’s SSH server.

Someone has failed to log on to the router’s SSH server.

Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.

Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.

Table 133 System Error Logs

LOG MESSAGE

%s exceeds the max. number of session per host!

setNetBIOSFilter: calloc error readNetBIOSFilter: calloc error

WAN connection is down.

DESCRIPTION

This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host.

The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.

The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.

A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network through this interface.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

397

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 134 Access Control Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Firewall default policy: [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

<Packet Direction>

Firewall rule [NOT] match:[ TCP

| UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF

] <Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>

DESCRIPTION

Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the default policy’s setting.

Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched (or did not match) a configured firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.

Triangle route packet forwarded:

[ TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF ]

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

Router sent blocked web site message: TCP

The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry.

The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested.

Table 135 TCP Reset Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Under SYN flood attack, sent TCP RST

Exceed TCP MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST

Peer TCP state out of order, sent TCP RST

Firewall session time out, sent TCP RST

DESCRIPTION

The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.)

The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of

TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the

Firewall Attack Alerts screen.

The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order.Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state.

The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out.Default timeout values:ICMP idle timeout (s): 60UDP idle timeout (s): 60TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout (s): 30TCP

FIN-wait timeout (s): 60TCP idle (established) timeout

(s): 3600

398

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 135 TCP Reset Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE

Exceed MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST

Access block, sent TCP

RST

DESCRIPTION

The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all

TCP and UDP connections through the firewall.)Note:

When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP)

> “Maximum Incomplete High”, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections <

“Maximum Incomplete Low”.

The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst").

Table 136 Packet Filter Logs

LOG MESSAGE

[ TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |

Generic ] packet filter matched (set: %d, rule: %d)

DESCRIPTION

Attempted access matched a configured filter rule

(denoted by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

For type and code details, see

Table 145 on page 402

.

Table 137 ICMP Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Firewall default policy: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,

<code:%d>

Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP

<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,

<type:%d>, <code:%d>

Triangle route packet forwarded:

ICMP

Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: ICMP

Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:

ICMP

Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP

DESCRIPTION

ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting.

ICMP access matched (or didn’t match) a firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.

The router blocked a packet that didn’t have a corresponding NAT table entry.

The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order.

The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

399

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 138 CDR Logs

LOG MESSAGE board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C01 Outgoing Call dev=%x ch=%x %s

DESCRIPTION

The router received the setup requirements for a call.

“call” is the reference (count) number of the call.

“dev” is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for

PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP). "channel" or “ch” is the call channel ID.For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call

3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times.

The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected.

board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 OutCall

Connected %d %s board %d line %d channel %d, call %d, %s C02 Call

Terminated

The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected.

Table 139 PPP Logs

LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION ppp:LCP Starting

The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage has started.

ppp:LCP Opening

The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is opening.

ppp:CHAP Opening

The PPP connection’s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening.

ppp:IPCP

Starting

The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting.

ppp:IPCP Opening

The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening.

ppp:LCP Closing

The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is closing.

ppp:IPCP Closing

The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing.

Table 140 UPnP Logs

LOG MESSAGE

UPnP pass through Firewall

DESCRIPTION

UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.

Table 141 Content Filtering Logs

LOG MESSAGE

%s: block keyword

%s

DESCRIPTION

The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword.

The system forwarded web content.

400

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

For type and code details, see

Table 145 on page 402

.

Table 142 Attack Logs

LOG MESSAGE attack [ TCP | UDP | IGMP

| ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

DESCRIPTION

The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack.

The firewall detected an ICMP attack.

attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) land [ TCP | UDP | IGMP |

ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack.

The firewall detected an ICMP land attack.

land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d) ip spoofing - WAN [ TCP |

UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |

OSPF ]

The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.

ip spoofing - WAN ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the

WAN port.

The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. icmp echo : ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) syn flood TCP ports scan TCP teardrop TCP teardrop UDP teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.

The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.

The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.

The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.

The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. illegal command TCP

NetBIOS TCP ip spoofing - no routing entry [ TCP | UDP | IGMP

| ESP | GRE | OSPF ]

The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.

The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack.

The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.

ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.

vulnerability ICMP

(type:%d, code:%d) traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)

The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack.

The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack.

Table 143 802.1X Logs

LOG MESSAGE

RADIUS accepts user.

RADIUS rejects user. Pls check

RADIUS Server.

User logout because of session timeout expired.

DESCRIPTION

A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server.

A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS

Server. Please check the RADIUS Server.

The router logged out a user whose session expired.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

401

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 143 802.1X Logs (continued)

LOG MESSAGE

User logout because of user deassociation.

DESCRIPTION

The router logged out a user who ended the session.

User logout because of no authentication response from user.

The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response.

User logout because of idle timeout expired.

The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired.

A user logged out.

User logout because of user request.

No response from RADIUS. Pls check RADIUS Server.

Use RADIUS to authenticate user.

There is no response message from the RADIUS server, please check the RADIUS server.

The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server.

No Server to authenticate user.

There is no authentication server to authenticate a user.

Table 144 ACL Setting Notes

PACKET

DIRECTION

(L to W)

(W to L)

(L to L/ZyXEL

Device)

(W to W/ZyXEL

Device)

DIRECTION

LAN to WAN

WAN to LAN

LAN to LAN/

ZyXEL Device

WAN to WAN/

ZyXEL Device

DESCRIPTION

ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the

WAN.

ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the

LAN.

ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the

LAN or the ZyXEL Device.

ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the

WAN or the ZyXEL Device.

Table 145 ICMP Notes

TYPE

0

3

CODE DESCRIPTION

Echo Reply

0

0

1

2

3

4

5

Echo reply message

Destination Unreachable

Net unreachable

Host unreachable

Protocol unreachable

Port unreachable

A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF)

Source route failed

402

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 145 ICMP Notes (continued)

TYPE

4

5

8

11

12

13

14

15

16

CODE DESCRIPTION

Source Quench

0

0

1

2

3

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network.

Redirect

Redirect datagrams for the Network

Redirect datagrams for the Host

Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network

Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host

Echo

Echo message

Time Exceeded

Time to live exceeded in transit

Fragment reassembly time exceeded

Parameter Problem

Pointer indicates the error

Timestamp

Timestamp request message

Timestamp Reply

Timestamp reply message

Information Request

Information request message

Information Reply

Information reply message

Table 146 Syslog Logs

LOG MESSAGE

<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd hr:mm:ss hostname src="<srcIP:srcPort>" dst="<dstIP:dstPort>" msg="<msg>" note="<note>" devID="<mac address last three numbers>" cat="<category>

DESCRIPTION

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as the system name if you haven’t configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN

MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the log’s syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The “devID” is the last three characters of the MAC address of the router’s

LAN port. The “cat” is the same as the category in the router’s logs.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

403

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 147 SIP Logs

LOG MESSAGE

SIP Registration Success by SIP:SIP Phone Number

SIP Registration Fail by

SIP:SIP Phone Number

SIP UnRegistration

Success by SIP:SIP Phone

Number

SIP UnRegistration Fail by SIP:SIP Phone Number

DESCRIPTION

The listed SIP account was successfully registered with a

SIP register server.

An attempt to register the listed SIP account with a SIP register server was not successful.

The listed SIP account’s registration was deleted from the

SIP register server.

An attempt to delete the listed SIP account’s registration from the SIP register server failed.

Table 148 RTP Logs

LOG MESSAGE

Error, RTP init fail

Error, Call fail: RTP connect fail

Error, RTP connection cannot close

DESCRIPTION

The initialization of an RTP session failed.

A VoIP phone call failed because the RTP session could not be established.

The termination of an RTP session failed.

Table 149 FSM Logs: Caller Side

LOG MESSAGE

VoIP Call Start Ph[Phone

Port Number] <- Outgoing

Call Number

DESCRIPTION

Someone used a phone connected to the listed phone port to initiate a VoIP call to the listed destination.

VoIP Call Established

Ph[Phone Port] ->

Outgoing Call Number

Someone used a phone connected to the listed phone port to make a VoIP call to the listed destination.

VoIP Call End Phone[Phone

Port]

A VoIP phone call made from a phone connected to the listed phone port has terminated.

404

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 23 Logs

Table 150 FSM Logs: Callee Side

LOG MESSAGE

VoIP Call Start from

SIP[SIP Port Number]

VoIP Call Established

Ph[Phone Port] <-

Outgoing Call Number

DESCRIPTION

A VoIP phone call came to the ZyXEL Device from the listed SIP number.

A VoIP phone call was set up from the listed SIP number to the ZyXEL Device.

VoIP Call End Phone[Phone

Port]

A VoIP phone call that came into the ZyXEL Device has terminated.

The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays.

Please refer to RFC 2408 for detailed information on each type.

Table 151 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types

LOG DISPLAY

SA

PROP

TRANS

KE

ID

CER

CER_REQ

HASH

SIG

NONCE

NOTFY

DEL

VID

PAYLOAD TYPE

Security Association

Proposal

Transform

Key Exchange

Identification

Certificate

Certificate Request

Hash

Signature

Nonce

Notification

Delete

Vendor ID

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

405

Chapter 23 Logs

406

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 4

Call History

24.1 Overview

The ZyXEL Device keeps track of when you use the phone ports for calls.

24.1.1 What You Can Do in the Call History Screens

• Use the Summary screen (

Section 24.2 on page 407

) to view a summary of the calls performed via the ZyXEL Device within a certain period.

• Use the Call History screen (

Section 24.3 on page 408 ) to see the details of the

calls performed on the ZyXEL Device.

• Use the Call History Settings screen (

Section 24.4 on page 409 ) to configure

to where the ZyXEL Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the

ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records.

24.2 Call History Summary Screen

Click Maintenance > Call History to open the Summary screen. Use the

Summary screen to view a summary of the calls performed via the ZyXEL Device within a certain period.

Figure 237 Maintenance > Call History > Summary

407

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 24 Call History

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 152 Maintenance > Call History > Summary

LABEL

Type of

Summary

Start Time

End Time

Tx Packets

Rx Packets

DESCRIPTION

This shows the time period.

This shows the date when the period starts.

This shows the date when the period ends.

This shows the number of voice packets the ZyXEL Device transmitted within this period.

This shows the number of voice packets the ZyXEL Device received within this period.

This shows how long the analog calls lasted within this period.

Duration of

PSTN

Duration of

VoIP

This shows how long the Voice over Internet calls lasted within this period.

24.3 Viewing the Call History

Click Maintenance > Call History > Call History to open the Call History screen. Use the Call History screen to see the details of the calls performed on the ZyXEL Device.

The call history buffer can hold up to 150 entries. When the call history buffer fills, old records are deleted as new ones are added. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order.

Figure 238 Maintenance > Call History > Call History

408

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 24 Call History

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 153 Maintenance > Call History > Call History

LABEL

View Call

History

DESCRIPTION

Select a category of call records to view.

Select All Call History to view any call records on the ZyXEL Device.

Select Missed Calls to view only calls which were not answered on the

ZyXEL Device.

Select Dialed Calls to view only calls which were dialed from the ZyXEL

Device.

Select Received Calls to view only calls which were received on the

ZyXEL Device

Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Call History Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the E-mail Log Settings fields in Call History Settings).

Refresh

Clear Call

History

Next Page

Click Refresh to renew the call history screen.

Click Clear Call History to delete all call records.

#

Type

Time

Duration

RxPacket

Interface

Choose a page from the drop-down list box to display the corresponding summary page of the call records.

This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.

This field displays the category of the call.

This field displays the time the call was recorded.

This field displays how long the call lasted.

Local Identity This field displays the phone number you used to make or receive this call.

Peer Number This field displays the phone number you called or from which this call is made.

TxPacket This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has transmitted for the call.

This field displays the number of packets the ZyXEL Device has received for the call.

This field displays the type of the call.

24.4 Configuring Call History Settings

Use the Call History Settings screen to configure to where the ZyXEL Device is to send call records and the schedule for when the ZyXEL Device is to send or save the call records.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

409

Chapter 24 Call History

To change your ZyXEL Device’s call history settings, click Maintenance > Call

History > Call History Settings. The screen appears as shown.

Figure 239 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings

410

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 154 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

E-mail Call History Settings

Mail Server

Mail Subject

Send Call

History to

Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.

Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the ZyXEL Device sends. Not all ZyXEL Device have this field.

The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field.

If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via e-mail.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 24 Call History

Table 154 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings

LABEL

Enable SMTP

Authentication

DESCRIPTION

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication if your mail server requests you to log in to receive or send e-mails. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-mail logs.

User Name Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) that you use to log into your mail server (usually the user name of a mail account).

Password

Send Call

History

Schedule

Enter the password associated with the user name above.

This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:

• Daily

• Weekly

• Hourly

• When Log is Full

• None.

If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.

Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs.

Day for

Sending Call

History

Time for

Sending Call

History

Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals

11:00 pm) to send the logs.

Clear Call

History after sending mail

Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs.

Save Call History Settings

Save Call

History

Schedule

This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being saved:

• Daily

• Weekly

• Hourly

Day for

Saving Call

History

Time for

Saving Call

History

If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the ZyXEL

Device saves the records. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the ZyXEL Device saves the records.

Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to save the records.

Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals

11:00 pm) to save the records.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

411

Chapter 24 Call History

Table 154 Maintenance > Call History > Call History Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Summary of Call History Settings

Start Date of

Every Month

Apply

Cancel Ó

Select which day of a month (from 1 to 28) on which the “Last Month” summary of call history (displays in the Summary screen) starts.

Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.

Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.

412

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 5

Tools

Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your ZyXEL Device.

25.1 Overview

Use the instructions in this chapter to change the device’s configuration file or upgrade its firmware. After you configure your device, you can backup the configuration file to a computer. That way if you later misconfigure the device, you can upload the backed up configuration file to return to your previous settings.

You can alternately upload the factory default configuration file if you want to return the device to the original default settings. The firmware determines the device’s available features and functionality. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s performance.

Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.

25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Tool Screens

• Use the Firmware Upgrade screen (

Section 25.2 on page 420 ) to upload

firmware to your device.

• Use the Configuration screen (

Section 25.3 on page 423 ) to backup and

restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default.

• Use the Restart screen ( Section 25.4 on page 426 ) to restart your ZyXEL

device.

25.1.2 What You Need To Know About Tools

Filename Conventions

The configuration file (often called the romfile or rom-0) contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password, DHCP Setup, and TCP/IP Setup. It

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

413

Chapter 25 Tools arrives from ZyXEL with a “rom” filename extension. Once you have customized the ZyXEL Device's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware and has a “bin” filename extension. Find this firmware at www.zyxel.com.With many FTP and TFTP clients, the filenames are similar to those seen next. ftp> put firmware.bin ras

This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file

"firmware.bin" to the ZyXEL Device.

ftp> get rom-0 config.cfg

This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file

“config.cfg”.

If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source, you will need to rename them as the ZyXEL Device only recognizes “rom-0” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.

The following table is a summary. Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the ZyXEL Device and the external filename refers to the filename not on the ZyXEL Device, that is, on your computer, local network or FTP site and so the name (but not the extension) may vary. After uploading new firmware, see the Status screen to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version.

Table 155 Filename Conventions

FILE TYPE

Configuration

File

INTERNAL

NAME

Rom-0

Firmware Ras

EXTERNAL NAME

This is the configuration filename on the

ZyXEL Device. Uploading the rom-0 file replaces the entire ROM file system, including your ZyXEL Device configurations, system-related data

(including the default password), the error log and the trace log.

This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the ZyXEL Device.

DESCRIPTIO

N

*.rom

*.bin

FTP Restrictions

FTP will not work when:

414

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

1

The firewall is active (turn the firewall off or create a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN).

2

You have disabled the FTP service in the Remote Management screen.

3

The IP you entered in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP. If it does not match, the device will disallow the FTP session immediately.

25.1.3 Before You Begin

• Ensure you have either created a firewall rule to allow access from the WAN or turned the firewall off, otherwise the FTP will not function.

• Make sure the FTP service has not been disabled in the Remote Management screen.

25.1.4 Tool Examples

Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration

This example shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration; please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk.

FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your device since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete.

Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. When the Restore

Configuration process is complete, the device automatically restarts.

Restore Using FTP Session Example

Figure 240 Restore Using FTP Session Example

ftp> put config.rom rom-0

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0

226 File received OK

221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec.

ftp>quit

Refer to Section 25.1.2 on page 413 to read about configurations that disallow

TFTP and FTP over WAN.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

415

Chapter 25 Tools

FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration File Uploads

These examples show you how to upload firmware and configuration files.

Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device.

FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. The following sections give examples of how to upload the firmware and the configuration files.

FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example

1

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

2

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your device.

3

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.

4

Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).

5

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

6

Use “put” to transfer files from the computer to the device, for example, “put firmware.bin ras” transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the device and renames it “ras”. Similarly, “put config.rom rom-0” transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the device and renames it

“rom-0”. Likewise “get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the device to your computer and renames it “config.rom.” See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

7

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

Figure 241 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec.

ftp> quit

416

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed in this chapter.

Refer to

Section 25.1.2 on page 413

to read about configurations that disallow

TFTP and FTP over WAN.

TFTP File Upload

The device also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File

Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

1

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

2

Enter the command “sys stdio 0” to disable the management idle timeout, so the

TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter “command sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

3

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

4

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the device and the computer. The file name for the firmware is “ras”.

Note that the telnet connection must be active and the device in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For

UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the device to the computer, “put” the other way around, and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

TFTP Upload Command Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras

Where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the device’s IP address, “put” transfers the file source on the computer (firmware.bin – name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the device).

Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

417

Chapter 25 Tools

Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration

1

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

2

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your ZyXEL Device.

3

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.

4

Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).

5

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

6

Use “get” to transfer files from the ZyXEL Device to the computer, for example,

“get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device to your computer and renames it “config.rom”. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

7

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

FTP Command Configuration Backup Example

This figure gives an example of using FTP commands from the DOS command prompt to save your device’s configuration onto your computer.

Figure 242 FTP Session Example

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec.

ftp> quit

418

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients

The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUIbased FTP clients.

Table 156 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients

COMMAND

Host Address

Login Type

DESCRIPTION

Enter the address of the host server.

Anonymous.

This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option.

Normal.

Transfer Type

The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.

Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.

Specify the default remote directory (path).

Initial Remote

Directory

Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).

Backup Configuration Using TFTP

The ZyXEL Device supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although

TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

1

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the ZyXEL Device and log in. Because

TFTP does not have any security checks, the ZyXEL Device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

2

Enter command “sys stdio 0” to disable the management idle timeout, so the

TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command “sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

3

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the ZyXEL Device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

4

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the ZyXEL

Device and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is “rom-0” (romzero, not capital o).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

419

Chapter 25 Tools

Note that the telnet connection must be active before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the ZyXEL Device to the computer and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom

where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the ZyXEL Device IP address, “get” transfers the file source on the ZyXEL Device (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom.

Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients

The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based

TFTP clients.

Table 157 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients

COMMAN

D

DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. 192.168.1.1 is the ZyXEL Device’s default IP address when shipped.

Send/

Fetch

Use “Send” to upload the file to the ZyXEL Device and “Fetch” to back up the file on your computer.

Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer.

Remote

File

Binary

Abort

This is the filename on the ZyXEL Device. The filename for the firmware is

“ras” and for the configuration file, is “rom-0”.

Transfer the file in binary mode.

Stop transfer of the file.

Refer to Section 25.1.2 on page 413

to read about configurations that disallow

TFTP and FTP over WAN.

25.2 Firmware Upgrade Screen

Click Maintenance > Tools to open the Firmware screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your ZyXEL Device. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes.

After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See Section on page 416 for

upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands.

420

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 243 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Upgrade

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 158 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware Upgrade

LABEL

Current

Firmware

Version

File Path

DESCRIPTION

This is the present Firmware version and the date created.

Browse...

Upload

Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click

Browse ... to find it.

Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.

Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

421

Chapter 25 Tools

After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again.

Figure 244 Firmware Upload In Progress

The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 245 Network Temporarily Disconnected

After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the

Status screen.

If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen.

Figure 246 Error Message

422

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

25.3 The Configuration Screen

See Section 25.5 on page 426 and

Section on page 415 for transferring

configuration files using FTP/TFTP commands.

Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.

Figure 247 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration

Backup Configuration

Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.

Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to your computer.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

423

Chapter 25 Tools

Restore Configuration

Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device.

Table 159 Restore Configuration

LABEL

File Path

DESCRIPTION

Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click

Browse ... to find it.

Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.

Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.

Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress.

After you see a “restore configuration successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the ZyXEL Device again.

Figure 248 Configuration Upload Successful

The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.

Figure 249 Network Temporarily Disconnected

424

If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See

Appendix A on page 459

for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen.

Figure 250 Configuration Upload Error

25.3.1 Reset to Factory Defaults

Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.

Figure 251 Reset Warning Message

Figure 252 Reset In Process Message

You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory

defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 1.5 on page 29

for more information on the RESET button.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

425

Chapter 25 Tools

25.4 Restart

System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off.

Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the ZyXEL Device reboot. This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration.

Figure 253 Maintenance > Tools > Restart Screen

25.5 Using FTP or TFTP to Back Up

Configuration

This section covers how to use FTP or TFTP to save your device’s configuration file to your computer.

25.5.1 Using the FTP Commands to Back Up Configuration

1

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

2

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your ZyXEL Device.

3

Enter your username as requested (the default is “admin”).

4

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a password.

5

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

6

Use “get” to transfer files from the ZyXEL Device to the computer, for example,

“get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device to your computer and renames it “config.rom”. See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

7

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

426

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

25.5.2 FTP Command Configuration Backup Example

This figure gives an example of using FTP commands from the DOS command prompt to save your device’s configuration onto your computer.

Figure 254 FTP Session Example

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> get rom-0 zyxel.rom

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec.

ftp> quit

25.5.3 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based FTP Clients

The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUIbased FTP clients.

Table 160 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients

COMMAND

Host Address

Login Type

DESCRIPTION

Enter the address of the host server.

Anonymous.

This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option.

Normal.

Transfer Type

The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.

Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.

Specify the default remote directory (path).

Initial Remote

Directory

Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).

25.5.4 Backup Configuration Using TFTP

The ZyXEL Device supports the up/downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although

TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

427

Chapter 25 Tools

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To backup the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

1

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the ZyXEL Device and log in. Because

TFTP does not have any security checks, the ZyXEL Device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

2

Enter command “sys stdio 0” to disable the management idle timeout, so the

TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter command “sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

3

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the ZyXEL Device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

4

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the ZyXEL

Device and the computer. The file name for the configuration file is “rom-0” (romzero, not capital o).

Note that the telnet connection must be active before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the ZyXEL Device to the computer and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

25.5.5 TFTP Command Configuration Backup Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host get rom-0 config.rom

where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the ZyXEL Device IP address, “get” transfers the file source on the ZyXEL Device (rom-0, name of the configuration file on the ZyXEL Device) to the file destination on the computer and renames it config.rom.

428

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

25.5.6 Configuration Backup Using GUI-based TFTP Clients

The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI-based

TFTP clients.

Table 161 General Commands for GUI-based TFTP Clients

COMMAN

D

DESCRIPTION

Host Enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device. 192.168.1.1 is the ZyXEL Device’s default IP address when shipped.

Send/

Fetch

Use “Send” to upload the file to the ZyXEL Device and “Fetch” to back up the file on your computer.

Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file (*.bin extension) or configuration file (*.rom extension) on your computer.

Remote

File

Binary

Abort

This is the filename on the ZyXEL Device. The filename for the firmware is

“ras” and for the configuration file, is “rom-0”.

Transfer the file in binary mode.

Stop transfer of the file.

Refer to

Section on page 414

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and

FTP over WAN.

25.6 Using FTP or TFTP to Restore Configuration

This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration. Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration; please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on disk.

FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your device since FTP is faster. Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete.

Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device. When the Restore

Configuration process is complete, the device automatically restarts.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

429

Chapter 25 Tools

25.6.1 Restore Using FTP Session Example

Figure 255 Restore Using FTP Session Example

ftp> put config.rom rom-0

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR rom-0

226 File received OK

221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp: 16384 bytes sent in 0.06Seconds 273.07Kbytes/sec.

ftp>quit

Refer to

Section on page 414

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and

FTP over WAN.

25.7 FTP and TFTP Firmware and Configuration

File Uploads

This section shows you how to upload firmware and configuration files.

Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may

PERMANENTLY DAMAGE your device.

FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. The following sections give examples of how to upload the firmware and the configuration files.

25.7.1 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt

Example

1

Launch the FTP client on your computer.

2

Enter “open”, followed by a space and the IP address of your device.

3

Enter your username as requested (the default is “admin”).

4

Press [ENTER] when prompted for a password.

5

Enter “bin” to set transfer mode to binary.

430

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 25 Tools

6

Use “put” to transfer files from the computer to the device, for example, “put firmware.bin ras” transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the device and renames it “ras”. Similarly, “put config.rom rom-0” transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.rom) to the device and renames it

“rom-0”. Likewise “get rom-0 config.rom” transfers the configuration file on the device to your computer and renames it “config.rom.” See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions.

7

Enter “quit” to exit the ftp prompt.

25.7.2 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

Figure 256 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload

331 Enter PASS command

Password:

230 Logged in ftp> bin

200 Type I OK ftp> put firmware.bin ras

200 Port command okay

150 Opening data connection for STOR ras

226 File received OK ftp: 1103936 bytes sent in 1.10Seconds 297.89Kbytes/sec.

ftp> quit

More commands (found in GUI-based FTP clients) are listed earlier in this chapter.

Refer to

Section on page 414

to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and

FTP over WAN.

25.7.3 TFTP File Upload

The device also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP (Trivial File

Transfer Protocol) over LAN. Although TFTP should work over WAN as well, it is not recommended.

To use TFTP, your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients. To transfer the firmware and the configuration file, follow the procedure shown next.

1

Use telnet from your computer to connect to the device and log in. Because TFTP does not have any security checks, the device records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

431

Chapter 25 Tools

2

Enter the command “sys stdio 0” to disable the management idle timeout, so the

TFTP transfer will not be interrupted. Enter “command sys stdio 5” to restore the five-minute management idle timeout (default) when the file transfer is complete.

3

Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the device. Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer.

4

Use the TFTP client (see the example below) to transfer files between the device and the computer. The file name for the firmware is “ras”.

Note that the telnet connection must be active and the device in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer. For details on TFTP commands (see following example), please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program. For

UNIX, use “get” to transfer from the device to the computer, “put” the other way around, and “binary” to set binary transfer mode.

25.7.4 TFTP Upload Command Example

The following is an example TFTP command: tftp [-i] host put firmware.bin ras

Where “i” specifies binary image transfer mode (use this mode when transferring binary files), “host” is the device’s IP address, “put” transfers the file source on the computer (firmware.bin – name of the firmware on the computer) to the file destination on the remote host (ras - name of the firmware on the device).

Commands that you may see in GUI-based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter.

432

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 6

Diagnostic

26.1 Overview

These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the

ZyXEL Device.

26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens

• Use the General Diagnostic screen (

Section 26.2 on page 433 ) to ping an IP

address.

• Use the DSL Line Diagnostic screen ( Section 26.3 on page 434

) to view the

DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line.

26.2 The General Diagnostic Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostic to open the screen shown next.

Figure 257 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General

433

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 26 Diagnostic

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 162 Maintenance > Diagnostic > General

LABEL

TCP/IP

Address

Ping

DESCRIPTION

Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection.

Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered.

26.3 The DSL Line Diagnostic Screen

Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next.

This screen is not available when you set the WAN mode to Ethernet WAN in the

WAN > Internet Access Setup screen using the DSL/WAN switch.

Figure 258 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line

434

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 26 Diagnostic

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 163 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line

LABEL

ATM Status

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to view your DSL connection’s Asynchronous Transfer

Mode (ATM) statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed.

The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into

ATM cells. It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets.

These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up.

inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received.

inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected.

outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent.

outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected.

inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and

Management (OAM) F4 cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more on OAM for ATM.

outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent.

inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received.

outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent.

openChan is the number of times that the ZyXEL Device has opened a logical DSL channel.

closeChan is the number of times that the ZyXEL Device has closed a logical DSL channel.

txRate is the number of bytes transmitted per second.

ATM Loopback

Test

rxRate is the number of bytes received per second.

Click this button to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The ZyXEL Device sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the ZyXEL Device. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and

ATM network.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

435

Chapter 26 Diagnostic

Table 163 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued)

LABEL

DSL Line

Status

DESCRIPTION

Click this button to view statistics about the DSL connections.

noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection (coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is.

Reset ADSL

Line

output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the

ZyXEL Device is using to transmit to the ISP.

attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal coming into the ZyXEL Device from the ISP.

Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a line’s bandwidth into sub-carriers (sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the line’s bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT.

The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per

DMT tone is 15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels.

Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:

Capture All

Logs

"Start to reset ADSL

Loading ADSL modem F/W...

Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"

Click this button to display information and statistics about your ZyXEL

Device’s ATM statistics, DSL connection statistics, DHCP settings, firmware version, WAN and gateway IP address, VPI/VCI and LAN IP address.

436

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 7

Troubleshooting

27.1 Overview

This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories.

Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

ZyXEL Device Access and Login

Internet Access

Phone Calls and VoIP

27.2 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.

1

Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on.

2

Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL

Device.

3

Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.

4

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

5

If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.

437

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

1

Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.4 on page 28 .

2

Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.

3

Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.

4

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

5

If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

27.3 ZyXEL Device Access and Login

I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.

1

The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.

2

If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.

3

If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See

Section 1.5 on page 29 .

I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

438

1

Make sure you are using the correct IP address.

• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.

• If you changed the IP address (

Section on page 131

), use the new IP address.

• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for

I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.

2

Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

3

Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has

JavaScripts and Java enabled. See

Appendix B on page 485

.

4

If you disabled Any IP ( Section 7.2.1 on page 124 ), make sure your computer is

in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the ZyXEL Device, skip this step.)

• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See

Appendix A on page 459

. Your ZyXEL Device is a

DHCP server by default.

• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP

address is in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device. See Appendix A on page

459 .

5

Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with

the default IP address. See Section 1.5 on page 29 .

6

If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.

Advanced Suggestions

• Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP.

• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port.

I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device.

1

Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly. The default user name is admin. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.

2

You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.

3

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

4

If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See

Section 27.2 on page 437 .

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

439

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device.

See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

Ignore the suggestions about your browser.

I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware.

See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

Ignore the suggestions about your browser.

27.4 Internet Access

I cannot access the Internet.

1

Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and

Section 1.4 on page 28

.

2

Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.

3

If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP.

4

Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick

Start Guide again.

5

If the problem continues, contact your ISP.

I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL

Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.

1

Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and

Section 1.4 on page 28

.

440

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

2

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

3

If the problem continues, contact your ISP.

The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.

1

There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check

Section

1.4 on page 28

. If the ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.

2

Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the ZyXEL

Device closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on).

3

Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.

4

If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.

Advanced Suggestions

• Check the settings for bandwidth management. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider changing the allocations.

• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.

27.5 Phone Calls and VoIP

The telephone port won’t work or the telephone lacks a dial tone.

1

Check the telephone connections and telephone wire.

I can access the Internet, but cannot make VoIP calls.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

441

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

1

The PHONE light should come on. Make sure that your telephone is connected to the PHONE port.

2

You can also check the VoIP status in the Status screen.

3

If the VoIP settings are correct, use speed dial to make peer-to-peer calls. If you can make a call using speed dial, there may be something wrong with the SIP server, contact your VoIP service provider.

27.6 Multiple SIP Accounts

You can set up two SIP accounts on your ZyXEL Device and your ZyXEL Device is equipped with two phone ports. By default your ZyXEL Device uses SIP account 1 with both phone ports for outgoing calls, and it uses SIP accounts 1 and 2 for incoming calls. With this setting, you always use SIP account 1 for your outgoing calls and you cannot distinguish which SIP account the calls are coming in through. If you want to control the use of different dialing plans for accounting purposes or other reasons, you need to configure your phone ports in order to control which SIP account you are using when placing or receiving calls.

27.6.1 Outgoing Calls

The following figure represents the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When you place a call from phone port 1 or phone port 2, the ZyXEL Device will use SIP account 1.

Figure 259 Outgoing Calls: Default

PHONE 1

SIP 1

Internet

PHONE 2

442

SIP 2

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2. In this case, every time you place a call through phone port 1, you are using your SIP account 1. Similarly, every time you place a call through phone port 2, you are using your SIP account 2. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen. See

Section 10.5 on page 194 .

Figure 260 Outgoing Calls: Individual Configuration

PHONE 1

SIP 1

Internet

PHONE 2 SIP 2

27.6.2 Incoming Calls

The following example shows the default behavior of your ZyXEL Device for incoming calls when two SIP accounts are configured and you are using two phones. When a call comes in from your SIP account 1, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring. Similarly, when a call comes in from your

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

443

Chapter 27 Troubleshooting

SIP account 2, the phones connected to both phone port 1 and phone port 2 ring.

In either case you are not sure which SIP account the call is coming from.

Figure 261 Incoming Calls: Default

PHONE 1

SIP 1

Internet

PHONE 2

SIP 2

In the next example, phone port 1 is configured to use SIP account 1 and phone port 2 is configured to use SIP account 2 for incoming calls. In this case, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 1, the phone connected to phone port 1 rings. Similarly, every time you receive a call from your SIP account 2, phone port 2 rings. To apply these configuration changes you need to configure the Analog Phone screen. See

Section 10.5 on page 194 .

Figure 262 Incoming Calls: Individual Configuration

PHONE 1

SIP 1

Internet

PHONE 2 SIP 2

444

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

C H A P T E R 2 8

Product Specifications

The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Device’s hardware and firmware features.

Hardware Specifications

Table 164 Hardware Specifications

Dimensions (218 W) x (144 D) x (40 H) mm

Weight

Power Specification

Built-in Switch

DSL Port

460 g

18V 1A DC

Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45

Ethernet ports

P-2612HW-F1: 1 RJ45 DSL Port

WAN Port

PHONE Ports

RESET Button

WLAN Button

P-2612HW-F3: 1 RJ11 DSL Port

1 RJ45 WAN Port

2 RJ-11 FXS POTS ports

Restores factory defaults

1 second: Turn on or off WLAN

Antenna

Operation

Temperature

5 seconds: Start WPS

One attached external dipole antenna, 2.9 dBi

0º C ~ 40º C

Storage Temperature -20º ~ 60º C

Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH

Storage Humidity

Distance between the centers of the holes

(for wall-mounting) on the device’s back

Screw size for wallmounting

20% ~ 90% RH

137.20mm

M4 tap

445

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Firmware Specifications

Table 165 Firmware Specifications

Default IP Address 192.168.1.1

Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)

Default User Name admin

DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address: 192.168.1.33

Static DHCP

Addresses

Content Filtering

Static Routes

Size: 32

10

Web page blocking by URL keyword.

16

Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device.

Wireless

Functionality

(wireless devices only)

Firmware Upgrade

Allow the IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security

(WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network.

Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator, an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the ZyXEL Device.

Configuration Backup

& Restoration

Network Address

Translation (NAT)

Port Forwarding

IEEE 802.1Q and

IEEE 802.1P

DHCP (Dynamic Host

Configuration

Protocol)

Dynamic DNS

Support

Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!

Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device’s configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earl i er configuration.

Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert your public IP address(es) to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network.

If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the

Internet.

Use IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and IEEE 802.1P priority tags in implementing QoS. Configure VLANs based on port, PVC, and

SSID. Specify a PVID to assign to untagged frames or prioritytagged frames received on this port, SSID, or PVC. Assign a priority for the traffic transmitted through a port, SSID, or PVC.

Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an

IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server

(DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients.

With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.

446

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 165 Firmware Specifications (continued)

IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP

(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).

Time and Date

Logs

Universal Plug and

Play (UPnP)

Firewall

Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually.

These dates and times are then used in logs.

Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL

Device to an external syslog server.

A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an

IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.

Your device has a stateful inspection firewall with DoS (Denial of

Service) protection. By default, when the firewall is activated, all incoming traffic from the WAN to the LAN is blocked unless it is initiated from the LAN. The firewall supports TCP/UDP inspection,

DoS detection and prevention, real time alerts, reports and logs.

Content Filtering

QoS (Quality of

Service)

Content filtering allows you to block access to Internet web sites that contain key words (that you specify) in the URL. You can also schedule when to perform the filtering and give trusted LAN IP addresses unfiltered Internet access.

You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers.

Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device.

Any IP The Any IP feature allows a computer to access the Internet and the ZyXEL Device without changing the network settings (such as

IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the ZyXEL Device are not in the same subnet.

PPPoE Support

(RFC2516)

PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL.

The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers.

IPSec VPN Capability Establish a Virtual Private Network (VPN) to connect with business partners and branch offices using data encryption and the Internet to provide secure communications without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. The ZyXEL Device VPN is based on the IPSec standard and is interoperable with other IPSec-based VPN products.

The ZyXEL Device supports up to two simultaneous IPSec connections.

Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out

PPPoE dial on demand

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

447

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 165 Firmware Specifications (continued)

Multiple PVC

(Permanent Virtual

Circuits) Support

Your device supports one Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs).

IP Alias

Packet Filters

ADSL Standards

IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. Your device supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the your device itself as the gateway for each LAN network.

Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network security and management.

Support ITU G.992.1 G.dmt

EOC specified in ITU-T G.992.1

ADSL2 G.dmt.bis (G.992.3)

ADSL2 G.lite.bis (G.992.4)

ADSL 2/2+ AnnexM

ADSL2+ (G.992.5)

Reach-Extended ADSL (RE ADSL)

SRA (Seamless Rate Adaptation)

Auto-negotiating rate adaptation

ADSL physical connection AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer type 5)

Multi-protocol over AAL5 (RFC 2684/1483)

PPP over ATM AAL5 (RFC 2364)

PPP over Ethernet (RFC 2516)

Multiple PPPoE

VC-based and LLC-based multiplexing

I.610 F4/F5 OAM

448

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 165 Firmware Specifications (continued)

Other Protocol

Support

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol

Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols

Management

RIP I/RIP II

ICMP

ATM QoS

SNMP v1 and v2c with MIB II support (RFC 1213)

IP Multicasting IGMP v1 and v2

IGMP Proxy

Embedded Web Configurator

CLI (Command Line Interpreter)

SNMP v1 & v2c with MIB II

Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore

Telnet for remote management

Remote Management Control: Telnet, FTP, Web, SNMP and DNS.

Remote Firmware Upgrade

Syslog

Voice Specifications

Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through the ZyXEL Device's phone port, you may need to subscribe to the services from your VoIP service provider.

Note: Not all features are supported by all service providers. Consult your service provider for more information.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

449

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 166 Voice Features

Call Park and

Pickup

Call park and pickup lets you put a call on hold (park) and then continue the call (pickup). The caller must still pay while the call is parked.

When you park the call, you enter a number of your choice (up to eight digits), which you must enter again when you pick up the call. If you do not enter the correct number, you cannot pickup the call. This means that only someone who knows the number you have chosen can pick up the call.

Call Return

Country Code

Do not Disturb

(DnD)

Auto Dial

Phone config

HTTP pincode

Firmware update enable / disable

Call waiting

You can have more than one call on hold at the same time, but you must give each call a different number.

With call return, you can place a call to the last number that called you (either answered or missed). The last incoming call can be through either SIP or PSTN.

Phone standards and settings differ from one country to another, so the settings on your ZyXEL Device must be configured to match those of the country you are in. The country code feature allows you to do this by selecting the country from a list rather than changing each setting manually. Configure the country code feature when you move the ZyXEL Device from one country to another.

This feature allows you to set your phone not to ring when someone calls you. You can set each phone independently using its keypad, or configure global settings for all phones using the command line interpreter.

You can set the ZyXEL Device to automatically dial a specified number immediately whenever you lift a phone off the hook. Use the Web

Configurator to set the specified number. Use the command line interpreter to have the ZyXEL Device wait a specified length of time before dialing the number.

The phone config table allows you to customize the phone keypad combinations you use to access certain features on the ZyXEL Device, such as call waiting, call return, and call forward. The phone config table is configurable in command interpreter mode.

If your service provider uses an auto provisioning server, you need to enter a personal identification number (supplied by your service provider) before you first use the feature.

If your service provider uses this feature, you hear a recorded message when you pick up the phone when new firmware is available for your ZyXEL Device. Enter *99# in your phone’s keypad to have the ZyXEL Device upgrade the firmware, or enter #99# to not upgrade. If your service provider gave you different numbers to use, enter them instead. If you enter the code to not upgrade, you can make a call as normal. You will hear the recording again each time you pick up the phone, until you upgrade.

This feature allows you to hear an alert when you are already using the phone and another person calls you. You can then either reject the new incoming call, put your current call on hold and receive the new incoming call, or end the current call and receive the new incoming call.

450

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 166 Voice Features

Call forwarding With this feature, you can set the ZyXEL Device to forward calls to a specified number, either unconditionally (always), when your number is busy, or when you do not answer. You can also forward incoming calls from one specified number to another.

Caller ID

REN

The ZyXEL Device supports caller ID, which allows you to see the originating number of an incoming call (on a phone with a suitable display).

A Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices (like telephones or fax machines) that may be connected to the telephone line. Your device has a REN of three, so it can support three devices per telephone port.

Dynamic Jitter

Buffer

Multiple SIP

Accounts

Multiple Voice

Channels

Voice Activity

Detection/Silence

Suppression

Comfort Noise

Generation

The built-in adaptive buffer helps to smooth out the variations in delay (jitter) for voice traffic. This helps ensure good voice quality for your conversations.

You can simultaneously use multiple voice (SIP) accounts and assign them to the telephone port.

Your device can simultaneously handle multiple voice channels

(telephone calls). Additionally you can answer an incoming phone call on a VoIP account, even while someone else is using the account for a phone call.

Voice Activity Detection (VAD) reduces the bandwidth that a call uses by not transmitting when you are not speaking.

Your device generates background noise to fill moments of silence when the other device in a call stops transmitting because the other party is not speaking (as total silence could easily be mistaken for a lost connection).

Echo Cancellation You device supports G.168, an ITU-T standard for eliminating the echo caused by the sound of your voice reverberating in the telephone receiver while you talk.

QoS (Quality of

Service)

Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms help to provide better service on a per-flow basis. Your device supports Type of Service (ToS) tagging and Differentiated Services (DiffServ) tagging. This allows the device to tag voice frames so they can be prioritized over the network.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

451

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 166 Voice Features

SIP ALG Your device is a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). It allows VoIP calls to pass through NAT for devices behind it (such as a SIP-based

VoIP software application on a computer).

Other Voice

Features

SIP version 2 (Session Initiatiion Protocol RFC 3261)

SDP (Session Description Protocol RFC 2327)

RTP (RFC 1889)

RTCP (RFC 1890)

Voice codecs (coder/decoders) G.711, G.729

Fax and data modem discrimination

DTMF Detection and Generation

DTMF: In-band and Out-band traffic (RFC 2833),(PCM), (SIP INFO)

Point-to-point call establishment between two IADs

Quick dialing through predefined phone book, which maps the phone dialing number and destination URL.

Flexible Dial Plan (RFC3525 section 7.1.14)

Wireless Features

Table 167 Wireless Features

External Antenna The ZyXEL Device is equipped with an attached antenna to provide a clear radio signal between the wireless stations and the access points.

Multiple SSID

WDS

Wireless LAN MAC Address

Filtering

WEP Encryption

Wi-Fi Protected Access

WPA2

Multiple SSID allows the ZyXEL Device to operate up to 4 different wireless networks simultaneously, each with independently configurable wireless and security settings.

WDS (Wireless Distribution System) lets the ZyXEL Device act as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points.

Your device can check the MAC addresses of wireless stations against a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts data frames before transmitting over the wireless network to help keep network communications private.

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. Key differences between WPA and WEP are user authentication and improved data encryption.

WPA 2 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA.

452

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 167 Wireless Features

WPS Wi-Fi Protected Setup

Other Wireless Features IEEE 802.11g Compliance

Frequency Range: 2.4 GHz ISM Band

Advanced Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM)

Data Rates: 54Mbps, 11Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 2Mbps, and 1 Mbps

Auto Fallback

Turn on-off WLAN by WLAN button (press the WLAN button for one second to turn the WLAN on or turn off; five seconds to turn on WPS)

IEEE 802.11i

IEEE 802.11e

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Data Encryption 64/128/256 bit.

WLAN bridge to LAN

Up to 32 MAC Address filters

IEEE 802.1x

External RADIUS server using EAP-MD5, TLS, TTLS

Scheduling lets you set when the WLAN is on.

The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device.

Table 168 Standards Supported

STANDARD

RFC 867

RFC 868

RFC 1058

RFC 1112

RFC 1157

RFC 1305

RFC 1441

RFC 1483

RFC 1631

RFC 1661

RFC 1723

RFC 1901

RFC 2236

RFC 2364

DESCRIPTION

Daytime Protocol

Time Protocol.

RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)

IGMP v1

SNMPv1: Simple Network Management Protocol version 1

Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)

SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2

Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

IP Network Address Translator (NAT)

The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)

SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c

Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.

PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL)

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

453

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Table 168 Standards Supported (continued)

STANDARD

RFC 2408

DESCRIPTION

Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol

(ISAKMP)

RFC 2516

RFC 2684

RFC 2766

IEEE 802.11

A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)

Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5.

Network Address Translation - Protocol

Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/

WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE

LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

IEEE 802.11b

IEEE 802.11g

IEEE 802.11d

Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band

Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band

Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media

Access Control (MAC) Bridges

IEEE 802.11x

IEEE 802.11e QoS

Port Based Network Access Control.

IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service

ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard.

G dmt(G.992.1) G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)

Transceivers

ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.

ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.

ITU G.992.3

(G.dmt.bis)

ITU G.992.4

(G.lite.bis)

ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates.

ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates.

ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits.

Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP (Microsoft's implementation of Point to Point Tunneling

Protocol)

RFC 2383

TR-069

1.363.5

ST2+ over ATM Protocol Specification - UNI 3.1 Version

TR-069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management.

Compliant AAL5 SAR (Segmentation And Re-assembly)

Power Adaptor Specifications

Table 169 Power Adaptor Specifications

NORTH AMERICAN PLUG

STANDARDS

AC Power Adapter Model

Input Power

MT18-Y180100-A1

120V~60Hz 0.5A

454

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Table 169 Power Adaptor Specifications (continued)

EUROPEAN PLUG

STANDARDS

AC Power Adapter Model

Input Power

MV18-Y180100-C5

230V~50Hz 0.5A

UNITED KINGDOM PLUG

STANDARDS

AC Power Adapter Model

Input Power

MV18-Y180100-B2

230V~50Hz 0.5A

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

Wall-mounting Instructions

Do the following to hang your ZyXEL Device on a wall.

Note: See

Table 164 on page 445

for the size of screws to use and how far apart to

place them.

1

Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall.

2

Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix.

Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws.

3

Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall.

4

Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the ZyXEL Device with the connection cables.

5

Align the holes on the back of the ZyXEL Device with the screws on the wall. Hang the ZyXEL Device on the screws.

Figure 263 Wall-mounting Example

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

455

Chapter 28 Product Specifications

The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm).

Figure 264 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw

456

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

P

ART

IV

Appendices and

Index

Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

(459)

Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java

Permissions (485)

IP Addresses and Subnetting (495)

Wireless LANs (507)

Common Services (531)

Legal Information (535)

Index (537)

457

458

A P P E N D I X A

Setting Up Your Computer’s IP

Address

Note: Your specific ZyXEL device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix. See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported.

This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network.

Windows Vista/XP/2000, Mac OS 9/OS X, and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP/IP on your computer.

If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP, make sure that your network’s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet.

In this appendix, you can set up an IP address for:

Windows XP/NT/2000 on page 459

Windows Vista on page 463

Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4

on

page 467

Mac OS X: 10.5

on page 471

Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME) on page 474

Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)

on

page 479

Windows XP/NT/2000

The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT.

459

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

1

Click Start > Control Panel.

Figure 265 Windows XP: Start Menu

2

In the Control Panel, click the Network Connections icon.

Figure 266 Windows XP: Control Panel

460

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

3

Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.

Figure 267 Windows XP: Control Panel > Network Connections > Properties

4

On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click

Properties.

Figure 268 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

461

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

5

The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens.

Figure 269 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

6

Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically.

Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred

DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.

7

Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

8

Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.

Verifying Settings

1

Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.

462

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

2

In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].

You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information.

Windows Vista

This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional.

1

Click Start > Control Panel.

Figure 270 Windows Vista: Start Menu

2

In the Control Panel, click the Network and Internet icon.

Figure 271 Windows Vista: Control Panel

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

463

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

3

Click the Network and Sharing Center icon.

Figure 272 Windows Vista: Network And Internet

4

Click Manage network connections.

Figure 273 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center

5

Right-click Local Area Connection and then select Properties.

Figure 274 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center

464

Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

6

Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and then select Properties.

Figure 275 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

465

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

7

The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens.

Figure 276 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties

8

Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically.

Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP. You may also have to enter a Preferred

DNS server and an Alternate DNS server, if that information was provided.Click Advanced.

9

Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.

10

Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.

Verifying Settings

1

Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.

466

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

2

In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER].

You can also go to Start > Control Panel > Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information.

Mac OS X: 10.3 and 10.4

The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.4 but can also apply to 10.3.

1

Click Apple > System Preferences.

Figure 277 Mac OS X 10.4: Apple Menu

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

467

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

2

In the System Preferences window, click the Network icon.

Figure 278 Mac OS X 10.4: System Preferences

468

3

When the Network preferences pane opens, select Built-in Ethernet from the network connection type list, and then click Configure.

Figure 279 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

4

For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP/IP tab.

Figure 280 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > TCP/IP Tab.

5

For statically assigned settings, do the following:

• From the Configure IPv4 list, select Manually.

• In the IP Address field, type your IP address.

• In the Subnet Mask field, type your subnet mask.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

469

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

• In the Router field, type the IP address of your device.

Figure 281 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Preferences > Ethernet

6

Click Apply Now and close the window.

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network

Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab.

Figure 282 Mac OS X 10.4: Network Utility

470

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

Mac OS X: 10.5

The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10.5.

1

Click Apple > System Preferences.

Figure 283 Mac OS X 10.5: Apple Menu

2

In System Preferences, click the Network icon.

Figure 284 Mac OS X 10.5: Systems Preferences

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

471

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

3

When the Network preferences pane opens, select Ethernet from the list of available connection types.

Figure 285 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet

472

4

From the Configure list, select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings.

5

For statically assigned settings, do the following:

• From the Configure list, select Manually.

• In the IP Address field, enter your IP address.

• In the Subnet Mask field, enter your subnet mask.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

• In the Router field, enter the IP address of your ZyXEL Device.

Figure 286 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Preferences > Ethernet

6

Click Apply and close the window.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

473

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking Applications > Utilities > Network

Utilities, and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab.

Figure 287 Mac OS X 10.5: Network Utility

Linux: Ubuntu 8 (GNOME)

This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the

GNU Object Model Environment (GNOME) using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution.

The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation.

Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.

Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME:

474

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

1

Click System > Administration > Network.

Figure 288 Ubuntu 8: System > Administration Menu

2

When the Network Settings window opens, click Unlock to open the

Authenticate window. (By default, the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked.)

You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password.

Figure 289 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

475

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

3

In the Authenticate window, enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button.

Figure 290 Ubuntu 8: Administrator Account Authentication

4

In the Network Settings window, select the connection that you want to configure, then click Properties.

Figure 291 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Connections

476

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

5

The Properties dialog box opens.

Figure 292 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > Properties

• In the Configuration list, select Automatic Configuration (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.

• In the Configuration list, select Static IP address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Gateway address fields.

6

Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

477

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

7

If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network

Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.

Figure 293 Ubuntu 8: Network Settings > DNS

8

Click the Close button to apply the changes.

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties by clicking System > Administration > Network

Tools, and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices

478

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address tab. The Interface Statistics column shows data if your connection is working properly.

Figure 294 Ubuntu 8: Network Tools

Linux: openSUSE 10.3 (KDE)

This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in the K

Desktop Environment (KDE) using the openSUSE 10.3 Linux distribution. The procedure, screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution, release version, and individual configuration. The following screens use the default openSUSE 10.3 installation.

Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.

Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE:

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

479

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

1

Click K Menu > Computer > Administrator Settings (YaST).

Figure 295 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu

2

When the Run as Root - KDE su dialog opens, enter the admin password and click OK.

Figure 296 openSUSE 10.3: K Menu > Computer Menu

480

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

3

When the YaST Control Center window opens, select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon.

Figure 297 openSUSE 10.3: YaST Control Center

4

When the Network Settings window opens, click the Overview tab, select the appropriate connection Name from the list, and then click the Configure button.

Figure 298 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

481

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

5

When the Network Card Setup window opens, click the Address tab

Figure 299 openSUSE 10.3: Network Card Setup

482

6

Select Dynamic Address (DHCP) if you have a dynamic IP address.

Select Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address. Fill in the

IP address, Subnet mask, and Hostname fields.

7

Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

8

If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the Hostname/DNS tab in

Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.

Figure 300 openSUSE 10.3: Network Settings

9

Click Finish to save your settings and close the window.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

483

Appendix A Setting Up Your Computer’s IP Address

Verifying Settings

Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP/IP properties. From the Options sub-menu, select Show Connection Information.

Figure 301 openSUSE 10.3: KNetwork Manager

When the Connection Status - KNetwork Manager window opens, click the

Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly.

Figure 302 openSUSE: Connection Status - KNetwork Manager

484

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

A P P E N D I X B

Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.

• JavaScripts (enabled by default).

• Java permissions (enabled by default).

Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.

Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers

You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.

Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service

Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.

Disable Pop-up Blockers

1

In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off

Pop-up Blocker.

Figure 303 Pop-up Blocker

You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

485

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

1

In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.

2

Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.

This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.

Figure 304 Internet Options: Privacy

3

Click Apply to save this setting.

Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions

Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.

1

In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.

486

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

2

Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.

Figure 305 Internet Options: Privacy

3

Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

487

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

4

Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.

Figure 306 Pop-up Blocker Settings

5

Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.

6

Click Apply to save this setting.

JavaScripts

If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed.

488

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

1

In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

Figure 307 Internet Options: Security

2

Click the Custom Level... button.

3

Scroll down to Scripting.

4

Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).

5

Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

489

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

6

Click OK to close the window.

Figure 308 Security Settings - Java Scripting

Java Permissions

1

From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

2

Click the Custom Level... button.

3

Scroll down to Microsoft VM.

4

Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.

490

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

5

Click OK to close the window.

Figure 309 Security Settings - Java

JAVA (Sun)

1

From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.

2

Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

491

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

3

Click OK to close the window.

Figure 310 Java (Sun)

Mozilla Firefox

Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.

You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears.

Figure 311 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options

492

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.

Figure 312 Mozilla Firefox Content Security

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

493

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

494

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

A P P E N D I X C

IP Addresses and Subnetting

This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.

IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device

(such as computers, servers, routers, and printers) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.

Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.

You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.

Introduction to IP Addresses

One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host

ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered.

Structure

An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).

Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or

0 to 255 in decimal.

495

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.

Figure 313 Network Number and Host ID

How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask.

Subnet Masks

A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term

“subnet” is short for “sub-network”.

A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host

ID.

The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).

Table 170 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Network Number

Host ID

1ST

OCTET:

2ND

OCTET:

3RD

OCTET:

4TH

OCTET

(192) (168) (1) (2)

11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010

11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000

11000000 10101000 00000001

00000010

496

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.

Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.

Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.

Table 171 Subnet Masks

8-bit mask

16-bit mask

24-bit mask

29-bit mask

BINARY

1ST

OCTET

2ND

OCTET

3RD

OCTET

4TH

OCTET

DECIMAL

11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0

11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0

11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0

11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248

Network Size

The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.

An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network

(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host

IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a

24-bit subnet mask, for example).

As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 172 Maximum Host Numbers

SUBNET MASK

8 bits

16 bits

24 bits

29 bits

255.0.0.0

255.255.0.0

255.255.255.0

255.255.255.248

HOST ID SIZE

24 bits

16 bits

8 bits

3 bits

2

24

– 2

2

16

– 2

2

8

– 2

2

3

– 2

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF

HOSTS

16777214

65534

254

6

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

497

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

Notation

Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.

For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask

255.255.255.128.

The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.

Table 173 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation

SUBNET MASK

255.255.255.0

255.255.255.128

255.255.255.192

255.255.255.224

255.255.255.240

255.255.255.248

255.255.255.252

ALTERNATIVE

NOTATION

/24

/25

/26

/27

/28

/29

/30

LAST OCTET

(BINARY)

0000 0000

1000 0000

1100 0000

1110 0000

1111 0000

1111 1000

1111 1100

LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL)

0

128

192

224

240

248

252

Subnetting

You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.

In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 2 8 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.

498

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.

Figure 314 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting

You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or

/25).

The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

499

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B.

Figure 315 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting

In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of

2 7 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).

192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.

Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.

Example: Four Subnets

The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01,

10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.

500

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2 6 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).

Table 174 Subnet 1

IP/SUBNET MASK

IP Address (Decimal)

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0

Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT

VALUE

0

11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000

11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62

Table 175 Subnet 2

IP/SUBNET MASK

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64

Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127

Table 176 Subnet 3

IP/SUBNET MASK

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128

Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191

Table 177 Subnet 4

IP/SUBNET MASK

IP Address

IP Address (Binary)

Subnet Mask (Binary)

Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192

Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT

VALUE

64

11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000

11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT

VALUE

128

11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000

11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190

NETWORK NUMBER

192.168.1.

LAST OCTET BIT

VALUE

192

11000000.10101000.00000001. 11000000

11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000

Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193

Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

501

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

Example: Eight Subnets

Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100,

101, 110 and 111).

The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 178 Eight Subnets

SUBNET

SUBNET

ADDRESS

128

160

192

224

0

32

64

96

FIRST ADDRESS

129

161

193

225

1

33

65

97

LAST

ADDRESS

158

190

222

254

30

62

94

126

BROADCAST

ADDRESS

159

191

223

255

31

63

95

127

Subnet Planning

The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.

Table 179 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED”

HOST BITS

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS

255.255.255.128 (/25) 2

255.255.255.192 (/26) 4

255.255.255.224 (/27) 8

255.255.255.240 (/28) 16

255.255.255.248 (/29) 32

255.255.255.252 (/30) 64

255.255.255.254 (/31) 128

NO. HOSTS PER

SUBNET

6

2

1

126

62

30

14

The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.

Table 180 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED”

HOST BITS

1

2

SUBNET MASK

255.255.128.0 (/17)

255.255.192.0 (/18)

NO. SUBNETS

2

4

NO. HOSTS PER

SUBNET

32766

16382

502

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

Table 180 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued)

NO. “BORROWED”

HOST BITS

3

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

12

13

14

15

SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS

255.255.224.0 (/19)

255.255.240.0 (/20)

255.255.248.0 (/21)

255.255.252.0 (/22)

8

16

32

64

255.255.254.0 (/23)

255.255.255.0 (/24)

128

256

255.255.255.128 (/25) 512

255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024

255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048

255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096

255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192

255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384

255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768

NO. HOSTS PER

SUBNET

8190

2

1

14

6

254

126

62

30

4094

2046

1022

510

Configuring IP Addresses

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.

If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned

Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device.

Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL

Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your

ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

503

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

Private IP Addresses

Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255

• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255

• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255

You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.

Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466,

Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.

IP Address Conflicts

Each device on a network must have a unique IP address. Devices with duplicate

IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources. The devices may also be unreachable through the network.

Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example

More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example computer A has a static (or fixed) IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client. Neither can access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP

504

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically.

Figure 316 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example

Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example

Since a router connects different networks, it must have interfaces using different network numbers. For example, if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet

(WAN), the router’s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets. In the following example, the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet. The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks.

Figure 317 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example

Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example

More than one device can not use the same IP address. In the following example, the computer and the router’s LAN port both use 192.168.1.1 as the IP address.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

505

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting

The computer cannot access the Internet. This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router’s LAN port.

Figure 318 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example

506

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

A P P E N D I X D

Wireless LANs

Wireless LAN Topologies

This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.

Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration

The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service

Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.

Figure 319 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network

BSS

A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).

Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

507

Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.

Figure 320 Basic Service Set

ESS

An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).

This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access

Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.

508

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.

Figure 321 Infrastructure WLAN

Channel

A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance.

Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent

AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.

RTS/CTS

A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

509

Appendix D Wireless LANs wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other.

Figure 322 RTS/CTS

510

When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.

RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To

Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.

When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS

(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.

Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.

You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.

If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.

Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

Fragmentation Threshold

A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames.

A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.

If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach

RTS/CTS size.

Preamble Type

Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet.

Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble.

Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.

Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications.

Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble.

Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.

IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an

IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point

(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

511

Appendix D Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates.

The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 181 IEEE 802.11g

DATA RATE

(MBPS)

1

2

5.5 / 11

6/9/12/18/24/36/

48/54

MODULATION

DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)

DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)

CCK (Complementary Code Keying)

OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)

Wireless Security Overview

Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network.

Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity.

The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device.

Table 182 Wireless Security Levels

SECURITY

LEVEL

SECURITY TYPE

Least

Secure

Unique SSID (Default)

Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled

MAC Address Filtering

WEP Encryption

IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server

Authentication

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)

WPA2

Most Secure

Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.

512

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

IEEE 802.1x

In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of

IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

• User based identification that allows for roaming.

• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,

2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network

RADIUS server.

• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients.

RADIUS

RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the

RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

• Authentication

Determines the identity of the users.

• Authorization

Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network.

• Accounting

Keeps track of the client’s network activity.

RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server.

Types of RADIUS Messages

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

• Access-Request

Sent by an access point requesting authentication.

• Access-Reject

Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.

• Access-Accept

Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

513

Appendix D Wireless LANs

• Access-Challenge

Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access.

The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another

Access-Request message.

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

• Accounting-Request

Sent by the access point requesting accounting.

• Accounting-Response

Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.

In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.

Types of EAP Authentication

This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS,

EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.

EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication.

The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. .

For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate

(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner.

EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)

MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client

‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.

514

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.

EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)

With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client.

After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.

However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead.

EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)

EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-

TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,

CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.

PEAP (Protected EAP)

Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity.

However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco.

LEAP

LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of

IEEE 802.1x.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

515

Appendix D Wireless LANs

Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.

If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled.

Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and

PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types.

Table 183 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types

Mutual Authentication

Certificate – Client

Certificate – Server

EAP-MD5

No

No

No

Dynamic Key Exchange No

Credential Integrity

Deployment Difficulty

Client Identity

Protection

None

Easy

No

EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Strong

Hard

No

Optional

Yes

Yes

Strong

Moderate

Yes

LEAP

Yes

Optional No

Yes No

Yes

Strong

Yes

Moderate

Moderate Moderate

Yes No

WPA and WPA2

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2

(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA.

Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication.

If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external

RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN.

516

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.

Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2.

WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.

Encryption

Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity

Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption than TKIP.

TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a perpacket key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism.

WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice.

The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically.

The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.

By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.

The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

517

Appendix D Wireless LANs keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP)

User Authentication

WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and preauthentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices.

Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again.

Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.

Wireless Client WPA Supplicants

A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's

Odyssey client.

The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows

XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows

XP to use it.

WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number

(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.

1

The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.

2

The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly.

3

A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client.

518

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

4

The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.

Figure 323 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

WPA(2)-PSK Application Example

A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.

1

First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared

Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols).

2

The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches.

3

The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

519

Appendix D Wireless LANs

4

The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them.

Figure 324 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication

Security Parameters Summary

Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features.

Table 184 Wireless Security Relational Matrix

AUTHENTICATION

METHOD/ KEY

MANAGEMENT

PROTOCOL

Open

ENCRYPTIO

N METHOD

None

ENTER

MANUAL KEY

No

Open

Shared

WPA

WPA-PSK

WPA2

WPA2-PSK

WEP

WEP

TKIP/AES

TKIP/AES

TKIP/AES

TKIP/AES

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

IEEE 802.1X

Disable

Enable without Dynamic WEP

Key

Enable with Dynamic WEP Key

Enable without Dynamic WEP

Key

Disable

Enable with Dynamic WEP Key

Enable without Dynamic WEP

Key

Disable

Enable

Disable

Enable

Disable

520

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

Antenna Overview

An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air.

The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air.

Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.

Antenna Characteristics

Frequency

An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz

(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN

Radiation Pattern

A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage area.

Antenna Gain

Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.

For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.

Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides.

Types of Antennas for WLAN

There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

521

Appendix D Wireless LANs

• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points.

• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to

120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.

Positioning Antennas

In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance.

For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.

For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.

WiFi Protected Setup

Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.

WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).

Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification

Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves.

522

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

Push Button Configuration

WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each

WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.

Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS

PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.

Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.

1

Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.

2

Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see

Section 8.6 on page 153

).

3

Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which).

4

Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.

If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list,

WPS was successful.

PIN Configuration

Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (you can change it to a new random number by clicking on a button in the configuration interface).

When you use the PIN method, you must enter the enrollee’s PIN into the registrar. Then, when WPS is activated on the enrollee, it presents its PIN to the registrar. If the PIN matches, the registrar sends the network and security information to the enrollee, allowing it to join the network.

The advantage of using the PIN method rather than the PBC method is that you can ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in the area. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices.

Take the following steps to set up WPS using the PIN method.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

523

Appendix D Wireless LANs

1

Decide which device you want to be the registrar (usually the AP) and which you want to be the enrollee (usually the client).

2

Look for the enrollee’s WPS PIN; it may be displayed on the device. If you don’t see it, log into the enrollee’s configuration interface and locate the PIN. Select the

PIN connection mode (not PBC connection mode). See the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see

Section 8.5 on page 152.

3

Log into the configuration utility of the registrar. Select the PIN connection mode

(not the PBC connection mode). Locate the place where you can enter the

enrollee’s PIN (if you are using the ZyXEL Device, see Section 8.6 on page 153 ).

Enter the PIN from the enrollee device.

4

Activate WPS on both devices within two minutes.

Note: Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.

5

On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful.

If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.

524

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.

Figure 325 Example WPS Process: PIN Method

ENROLLEE

WPS

This device’s

WPS PIN: 123456

REGISTRAR

WPS

Enter WPS PIN from other device:

START

WPS

START

WPS

WITHIN 2 MINUTES

SECURE EAP TUNNEL

SSID

WPA(2)-PSK

COMMUNICATION

How WPS Works

When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role.

One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible

Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-

PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

525

Appendix D Wireless LANs already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.

The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.

Figure 326 How WPS works

ACTIVATE

WPS

WITHIN 2 MINUTES

ACTIVATE

WPS

WPS HANDSHAKE

526

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR

SECURE TUNNEL

SECURITY INFO

COMMUNICATION

The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.

The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.

Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.

By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.

Example WPS Network Setup

This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.

The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.

Figure 327 WPS: Example Network Step 1

ENROLLEE REGISTRAR

SECURITY INFO

CLIENT 1 AP1

In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2.

Figure 328 WPS: Example Network Step 2

REGISTRAR

EXISTING CONNECTION

CLIENT 1 AP1

ENROLLEE

SE

CU

RIT

Y I

NF

O

CLIENT 2

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

527

Appendix D Wireless LANs

In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.

Figure 329 WPS: Example Network Step 3

EXISTING CONNECTION

CLIENT 1

EX

IST

ING

CO

NN

EC

TIO

N

AP1

REGISTRAR

CLIENT 2

SEC

URIT

Y IN

FO

ENROLLEE

AP1

Limitations of WPS

WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.

• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).

• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.

For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.

• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS.

WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-

PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).

528

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix D Wireless LANs

• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.

You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients

(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown

MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

529

Appendix D Wireless LANs

530

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

A P P E N D I X E

Common Services

The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. For a comprehensive list of port numbers, ICMP type/ code numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) web site.

Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like.

Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/

UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is

USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.

Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.

• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.

• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.

Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used.

Table 185 Commonly Used Services

NAME

AH

(IPSEC_TUNNEL)

AIM/New-ICQ

AUTH

BGP

BOOTP_CLIENT

BOOTP_SERVER

CU-SEEME

DNS

PROTOCOL

User-Defined

TCP

TCP

TCP

UDP

UDP

TCP

UDP

TCP/UDP

PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication

Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.

5190

113

179

68

67

7648

24032

53

AOL’s Internet Messenger service. It is also used as a listening port by

ICQ.

Authentication protocol used by some servers.

Border Gateway Protocol.

DHCP Client.

DHCP Server.

A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.

Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for example www.zyxel.com

) to IP numbers.

531

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix E Common Services

Table 185 Commonly Used Services (continued)

NAME

ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL)

FINGER

FTP

H.323

HTTP

HTTPS

ICMP

ICQ

IGMP

(MULTICAST)

IKE

IRC

MSN Messenger

NEW-ICQ

NEWS

NFS

NNTP

PING

POP3

PROTOCOL

User-Defined

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP

User-Defined

UDP

User-Defined

UDP

TCP/UDP

TCP

TCP

TCP

UDP

TCP

User-Defined

TCP

PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation

Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.

79

20

21

1720

80

443

1

4000

2

500

6667

1863

5190

144

2049

119

1

110

Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.

File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.

NetMeeting uses this protocol.

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web.

HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.

Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic or routing purposes.

This is a popular Internet chat program.

Internet Group Management Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.

The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.

This is another popular Internet chat program.

Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.

An Internet chat program.

A protocol for news groups.

Network File System - NFS is a client/ server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.

Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the

USENET newsgroup service.

Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.

Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a

POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).

532

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Appendix E Common Services

Table 185 Commonly Used Services (continued)

NAME

PPTP

PPTP_TUNNEL

(GRE)

RCMD

REAL_AUDIO

REXEC

RLOGIN

RTELNET

RTSP

SFTP

SMTP

SNMP

SNMP-TRAPS

SQL-NET

SSH

STRM WORKS

SYSLOG

TACACS

TELNET

PROTOCOL

TCP

User-Defined

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP

TCP/UDP

TCP

TCP

TCP/UDP

TCP/UDP

TCP

TCP/UDP

UDP

UDP

UDP

TCP

512

7070

514

513

107

554

PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.

47

115

25

161

162

1521

22

1558

514

49

23

PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling

Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.

Remote Command Service.

A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.

Remote Execution Daemon.

Remote Login.

Remote Telnet.

The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the

Internet.

Simple File Transfer Protocol.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the

Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.

Simple Network Management

Program.

Traps for use with the SNMP

(RFC:1215).

Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.

Secure Shell Remote Login Program.

Stream Works Protocol.

Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.

Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal

Access Controller Access Control

System).

Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the

Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

533

Appendix E Common Services

Table 185 Commonly Used Services (continued)

NAME

TFTP

VDOLIVE

PROTOCOL

UDP

TCP

PORT(S) DESCRIPTION

69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an

Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User

Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP

(Transmission Control Protocol).

7000 Another videoconferencing solution.

534

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

A P P E N D I X F

Legal Information

Copyright

Copyright © 2009 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL

Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.

Certifications

Notices

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

535

Appendix F Legal Information

Viewing Certifications

1

Go to http://www.zyxel.com

.

2

Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.

3

Select the certification you wish to view from this page.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of

ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http:// www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.

Registration

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for

North American products.

536

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Numerics

802.11 mode

148

802.1Q/1P

325

activation

332

example

327

group settings

333

management VLAN

332

port settings

335

priority

325, 336

PVC

326

PVID

336

tagging frames

326, 335

A

AAL5

448

access point, See AP

137

accounting server

WLAN accounting server

147

ACK message

211

activation

802.1Q/1P

332

content filtering

254

firewalls

235

wireless LAN scheduling

156

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)

134

ADSL2

448

Advanced Encryption Standard, see AES

AES

155, 517

AH

278

alerts firewalls

240

ALG

178, 452

algorithms

278

alternative subnet mask notation

498

antenna

445

directional

522

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Index

Index

gain

521

omni-directional

522

anti-probing

230

any IP

126, 133, 447

how it works

134

note

134

AP (Access Point)

137, 509

Application Layer Gateway

178, 452

applications

Internet access

25

VoIP

27

asymmetrical routes

235

Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM

ATM

435

ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5)

114

ATM Adaptation Layer 5, see AAL5

audience

3

authentication server

147

auto dial

450

auto firmware upgrade

222

automatic logout

32

auto-negotiating rate adaptation

448

auto-provisioning

222

B backup

423

backup type

112

bandwidth management

337

Basic Service Set, see BSS

blinking LEDs

28

bridge mode

102

BSS

507

BYE request

211

537

Index

C

CA

291, 515

call forwarding

451

call hold

218, 219, 224, 226

call park and pickup

450

call return

450

call service mode

217, 219, 223, 225

call transfer

218, 220, 225, 226

call waiting

218, 220, 224, 226, 450

caller ID

451

CBR

105, 110

certificate creation

301

details

297

factory default

295

Certificate Authority, see CA

certificates

291

and directory servers

316

and remote hosts

311

CA

291

creating

301

importing

301

remote hosts

315

replacing

295

storage space

295

thumbprint algorithms

294

thumbprints

294

trusted CAs

304, 306

verifying fingerprints

293

Certification Authority, see CA

certifications

535

notices

535

viewing

536

channel

509

interference

509

channel ID

141

channel scan

141

Class of Service

215

Class of Service, see CoS

client-server protocol

208

codecs

452

comfort noise generation

195, 451

command interface

27

configuration file

413

538 content filtering

251, 447

activation

254

example

252

keywords

254

schedules

255

trusted IP addresses

256

URL

251

Continuous Bit Rate, see CBR

copyright

535

CoS

215, 351

country code

450

CTS (Clear to Send)

510

customized services

239, 240, 241

D default

425

default LAN IP address

31

Denial of Service, see DoS

Denials of Service, see DoS

device management command interface

27

Telnet

27

DH

286

DHCP

91, 122, 130, 353

server

131

static

127

DHCP relay

446

DHCP server

446

diagnostic

433

differentiated services

216

Differentiated Services, see DiffServ

Diffie-Hellman key groups

286

DiffServ (Differentiated Services)

215

code points

215

marking rule

216, 351

directory servers adding/editing

318

and certificates

316

disclaimer

535

DnD

450

DNS

122, 130, 365

DNS Server for VPN host

283

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Index

Do not Disturb, see DnD

domain name system, see DNS

DoS

230

three-way handshake

242

thresholds

230, 241, 242, 243

DS (Differentiated Services)

351

DS field

216, 351

DSCP

215, 351

DSL firmware version

90

DSL line, reinitialize

436

DSL mode

91

DSL/WAN switch

102

DTMF

213

detection and generation

452

Dual-Tone MultiFrequency, see DTMF

dynamic DNS

353

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP

dynamic jitter buffer

451

dynamic secure gateway address

259

dynamic WEP key exchange

516

DYNDNS wildcard

353

E

EAP Authentication

514

EAP-MD5

453

echo cancellation

195, 451

e-mail log example

395

encapsulated routing link protocol (ENET

ENCAP)

114

encapsulation

100, 102, 113, 281

ENET ENCAP

114

PPP over Ethernet

114

PPPoA

114

RFC 1483

114

encryption

517

ESP

278

ESS

508

Europe type call service mode

217, 223

Extended Service Set, see ESS

external accounting server

147

external antenna

452

external authentication server

147

external RADIUS

453

F

F4/F5 OAM

448

filename conventions

413, 414

filters content

251

activation

254

example

252

keywords

254

schedules

255

trusted IP addresses

256

URL

251

firewalls

229

actions

239

activation

235

address types

239

alerts

240

anti-probing

230

asymmetrical routes

235

configuration

234, 237, 243

customized services

239, 240, 241

default action

235

DoS

230

thresholds

230, 241, 242, 243

example

230

half-open sessions

244

ICMP

230

logs

239

maximum incomplete

244

P2P

243

packet direction

235

rules

236, 245

schedules

239

security

246

three-way handshake

242

thresholds

241

triangle route

235, 247

solutions

248

firmware

414

auto upgrade

222

upload

420

upload error

422

version

90

flash key

217, 223

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

539

Index flashing

217, 223

fragmentation threshold

148, 511

frequency range

453

FTP

172, 361

file upload

416, 430

restrictions

414

FTP restrictions

414

G

G.168

195, 451

G.711

452

G.729

452

G.992.1

448

G.992.3

448

G.992.4

448

G.992.5

448

group key update timer

145, 147

H half-open sessions

244

hidden node

509

hide SSID

141

host

387

host name

90

HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)

420

HTTP pincode

222

humidity

445

I

IAD

25

IANA

132, 504

IBSS

507

ICMP

230

ID type and content

284

idle timeout

145, 147

IEEE 802.11b

148

IEEE 802.11g

148, 511

540

IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN

452

IEEE 802.11i

452

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

216

IGMP

125, 133

IGMP proxy

449

IGMP v1

449

IGMP v2

449

IKE phases

282

importing certificates

301

importing trusted CAs

306

importing trusted remote hosts

315

Independent Basic Service Set, see IBSS

initialization vector (IV)

517

inside header

281

install UPnP

371

Windows Me

372

Windows XP

373

Integrated Access Device, see IAD

intended audience

3

Internet wizard setup

39

Internet access

25, 39

wizard setup

39

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

See IANA

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority, see IANA

Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP

Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP

Internet Key Exchange

282

Internet Protocol Security, see IPSec

Internet Service Provider, see ISP

IP address

91, 131, 172, 174, 222

default

31

static

67

WAN

100

IP address assignment

115

ENET ENCAP

116

PPPoA or PPPoE

115

RFC 1483

116

IP alias

128, 448

IP multicasting

449

IP pool

124, 130

IPSec

257

algorithms

278

architecture

278

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

NAT

278

see also VPN

standard

447

IPSec VPN capability

447

ISP

100

ITU-T

195

ITU-T G.992.1

436

J jitter buffer

451

K keep alive

283

key combinations

227

keypad

227

L

LAN

121

listening port

192

Local Area Network, see LAN

logical networks

128

logout

32

automatic

32

logs

391, 407

firewalls

239

M

MAC

90, 126

MAC address filter

139

action

151

MAC filter

151

Management Information Base, see MIB

management VLAN

332

managing the device command interface

27

good habits

28

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Telnet

27 using FTP. See FTP.

Maximum Burst Size, see MBS

maximum incomplete

244

Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU

MBS

105, 111, 117

Media Access Control, see MAC

Media Access Control, see MAC Address

Message Integrity Check, see MIC

metric

116

MIB

363

MIC

517

mode

102

model name

90

MTU

105, 111

multicast

125, 133

multimedia

206

multiple BSSs

149

multiple PVC support

448

multiple SIP accounts

451

multiple voice channels

451

multiplexing

115

LLC-based

115

VC-based

115

multiprotocol encapsulation

114

my IP address

258

Index

N nailed-up connection

116

NAT

131, 172, 173, 503

address mapping rule

177

application

182

definitions

179

how it works

180

IPSec

278

mapping types

182

mode

171

traversal

279, 369

tutorial

66, 83

what it does

180

negotiation mode

283

NetBIOS

126

Network Address Translation, see NAT

541

Index

Network Basic Input/Output System, see

NetBIOS

non-proxy calls

200

542

O

OAM

448

OK response

211, 213

operation humidity

445

operation temperature

445

output power

148

outside header

281

P

P2P

243

packet direction

235

Pairwise Master Key (PMK)

517, 519

park

450

passphrase

143

PCR

105, 111, 117

Peak Cell Rate, see PCR

peer-to-peer calls

27, 200

Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB

PHB

216, 351

phone book speed dial

200

phone config

450

phone functions

227

pickup

450

pincode

222

Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation

Layer 5 (AAL5)

114

point-to-point calls

452

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, see

PPPoE

ports

28

power adaptor

453

power specifications

445

PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer

Protocol

449

PPP over ATM AAL5

448

PPP over Ethernet

448

PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE

PPPoE

100, 114, 447

benefits

114

preamble

148

preamble mode

511

pre-shared key

286

probing, firewalls

230

product registration

536

profile

63

protocol

100

PSK

155, 517

PSTN call setup signaling

213

pulse dialing

214

PVC

326

PVID

336

Q

QoS

215, 337, 338, 350, 451

class configuration

343

Quality of Service

451

Quality of Service, see QoS

quick dialing

452

Quick Start Guide

31

R

RADIUS

453, 513

message types

513

messages

513

shared secret key

514

Reach-Extended ADSL

448

Real time Transport Protocol, see RTP

re-authentication timer

145, 147

region

450

registration, product

536

reinitialize ADSL line

436

related documentation

3

remote hosts, and certificates

311

remote management limitations

358

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

NAT

359

Telnet

360

REN

451

Request To Send, see RTS

RESET button

29

restore configuration

415, 424, 429

RFC 1483

114, 448

RFC 1631

169

RFC 1889

210, 452

RFC 1890

452

RFC 2327

452

RFC 2364

448

RFC 2516

447, 448

RFC 2684

448

RFC 3261

452

Ringer Equivalence Number, see REN

RIP

124, 129, 132

direction

132

version

133

romfile

413

router features

25

Routing Information Protocol

see RIP

Routing Information Protocol, see RIP

routing mode

102

RTCP

452

RTP

210, 452

RTS (Request To Send)

510

threshold

509, 510

RTS/CTS threshold

148

S safety warnings

7

scan

141

schedules content filtering

255

firewalls

239

scheduling wireless LAN

156

SCR

105, 111, 117

SDP

452

seamless rate adaptation

448

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide secure gateway address

258 security associations, see VPN

Security Parameter Index

271

security, network

246

server

183, 389

service set

141, 150

Service Set IDentification, see SSID

Service Set IDentity, see SSID

Session Description Protocol

452

Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP

setup

222

shared secret

147

silence suppression

195, 451

Single User Account, see SUA

SIP

206

account

51, 207

accounts

451

ALG

178, 452

Application Layer Gateway

178, 452

call progression

210

client

208

identities

207

INVITE request

211, 212

number

207

OK response

213

proxy server

208

redirect server

209

register server

210

server address

52

servers

208

service domain

207

settings

51

URI

207

user agent

208

version 2

452

SMTP error messages

395

SNMP

362, 449

manager

363

MIBs

363

speed dial

200, 221

SPI

271

SRA

448

SSID

141, 149, 150

stateful inspection

447

static DHCP

127

static IP address

67

Index

543

Index static route

321

status

89

status indicators

28

storage humidity

445

storage temperature

445

SUA

170

subnet

495

subnet mask

131, 496

subnetting

498

supplementary services

216, 223

Sustained Cell Rate, see SCR

switch

102

syntax conventions

5

system name

90, 386

system timeout

359

544

T tagging frames

326, 335

TCP/IP

131

Telnet

27, 360

temperature

445

Temporal Key Integrity Protocol, see TKIP

TFTP file upload

417, 431

TFTP and FTP over WAN

414

The

100

three-way conference

219, 220, 225, 226

three-way handshake

242

thresholds

DoS

230, 241, 242, 243

P2P

243

TKIP

155, 517

TLS

453

ToS

215

trademarks

535

traffic priority

325, 336

traffic redirect

113, 119

traffic shaping

117

transparent bridging

449

transport mode

281

triangle route

235, 247

solutions

248

trusted CAs, and certificates

304

TTLS

453

tunnel mode

281

tutorial

NAT

66, 83

VoIP

84

wireless

57

Type of Service, see ToS

U

UBR

105, 110

Uniform Resource Identifier

207

Universal Plug and Play

369

application

370

Unspecified Bit Rate, see UBR

upload firmware

416, 430

UPnP

369

forum

370

security issues

370

URL

251

USA type call service mode

219, 225

V

VAD

195, 451

Variable Bit Rate non real-time, see VB-nRT

Variable Bit Rate real-time, see VB-RT

VBR-nRT

105, 110

VBR-RT

105, 110

VCI

102, 115

version

DSL

90

ZyNOS

90

Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI

Virtual Circuit (VC)

115

Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN

Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI

Virtual Private Network, see VPN

VLAN

216, 325

802.1P priority

325, 336

activation

332

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

example

327

group

216

group settings

333

ID

216

ID tags

216

management group

332

port settings

335

PVC

326

PVID

336

tagging frames

326, 335

voice activity detection

195, 451

voice channels

451

voice coding

213

VoIP

206

features

27

peer-to-peer calls

200

standards compliance

451

tutorial

84

wizard setup

51

VoIP features

27

VPI

102, 115

VPI & VCI

115

VPN

257, 447

established in two phases

258

IPSec

257

security associations (SA)

258 see also IKE SA, IPSec SA

W

WAN

MTU

105, 111

Wide Area Network, see WAN

99

warnings

7

warranty

536

note

536

WDS

154

Web

359

Web Configurator

31

WEP

50, 143, 452

Wi-Fi Protected Access, see WPA

Windows Networking

126

Wired Equivalent Privacy, see WEP

wireless client configuration

60

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide profile

63

security

49, 512

tutorial

57

wireless client

137

wireless client WPA supplicants

518

Wireless Distribution System, see WDS

wireless LAN channel

141

MAC address filter

139, 452

scheduling

156

wireless network example

137

overview

137

wireless security

512

wizard setup

Internet

39

VoIP

51

WLAN

137

802.11 mode

148

AES

155

authentication server

147

auto-scan channel

141

button

30

channel

141

fragmentation threshold

148

group key update timer

145, 147

hide SSID

141

idle timeout

145, 147

IEEE 802.11b

148

IEEE 802.11g

148

interference

509

more AP

149

multiple BSSs

149

output power

148

passphrase

143

preamble

148

PSK

155

re-authentication timer

145, 147

RTS/CTS threshold

148

scheduling

156

security parameters

520

see also wireless.

TKIP

155

WDS

154

WEP

143

WPA

146

WPA-PSK

144

WPA

146, 452, 516

Index

545

Index key caching

518

pre-authentication

518

user authentication

518

vs WPA-PSK

517

wireless client supplicant

518

with RADIUS application example

518

WPA2

516

user authentication

518

vs WPA2-PSK

517

wireless client supplicant

518

with RADIUS application example

518

WPA2-Pre-Shared Key, see WPA2-PSK

WPA2-PSK

516, 517

application example

519

WPA-PSK

49, 144, 517

application example

519

Z

ZyNOS

414

F/W version

414

firmware version

90

ZyXEL Network Operating System, see ZyNOS

546

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

Index

P-2612HW Series User’s Guide

547

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents